Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Medium-Voltage AC-Converter
SINAMICS GM150
Start
Introduction
Safety Instructions
Medium-Voltage AC Converters
Commissioning (software)
SINAMICS GM150
Commissioning Manual for
SINAMICS GM150, Software
Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning (hardware)
Parameter assignment /
addressing
Functions
Appendix
Commissioning Manual
1/2008
A5E00923869K
Start
Start
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90327 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Ordernumber: A5E00923869K
05/2008
Start
Table of contents
1
Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1
1.2
2.2
ESD-sensitive components..........................................................................................................11
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
Commissioning tools....................................................................................................................19
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Software installation.....................................................................................................................19
System requirements for installing STARTER.............................................................................19
Installing STARTER .....................................................................................................................20
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
3.6.3.2
3.6.3.3
3.6.3.4
3.6.3.5
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
3.6.4.3
3.6.4.4
3.6.5
3.6.5.1
3.6.5.2
3.6.5.3
3.6.5.4
3.6.6
3.6.7
Downloading the drive project to the target system and saving ................................................. 83
Entering additional important parameters (V2.5) ........................................................................ 87
First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard ............................................................... 91
Creating a new project ................................................................................................................ 91
Configure the drive unit ............................................................................................................... 97
Start drive project and download to target device..................................................................... 116
Entering additional important parameters ................................................................................. 121
Concluding parameter comparison ........................................................................................... 124
Saving a project ........................................................................................................................ 128
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.1.3
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.5.1
3.7.5.2
3.7.5.3
3.7.6
3.7.6.1
3.7.6.2
3.7.6.3
3.7.6.4
3.7.6.5
3.7.6.6
3.7.6.7
3.7.6.8
3.7.6.9
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.4
4.3.2.5
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.3.2
4.3.3.3
4.4
4.4.1
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
5.1
Parameters.................................................................................................................................185
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
5.4
5.5
Reference parameters/normalizations.......................................................................................199
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.5.1
6.2.5.2
6.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.1.1
6.4.1.2
6.4.1.3
6.4.1.4
6.4.1.5
6.4.1.6
6.4.1.7
6.4.1.8
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.2.5
6.4.2.6
6.4.2.7
6.4.2.8
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.7.1
6.4.7.2
6.4.7.3
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
6.4.7.4
6.4.8
6.4.8.1
6.4.8.2
6.4.8.3
6.4.8.4
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.2.1
6.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
6.7.3
6.7.3.1
6.7.3.2
6.8
6.8.1
6.8.2
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 310
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 310
Diagnostics via LEDs ................................................................................................................ 310
Diagnostics via parameters....................................................................................................... 312
Indicating and rectifying faults................................................................................................... 316
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 317
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.3.1
A.3.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Table of contents
A.3.3
A.3.4
A.3.5
A.3.6
A.3.7
A.3.8
A.3.9
A.3.10
A.3.11
A.3.12
A.3.13
A.3.14
A.3.15
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Start
Introduction
1.1
Overview
Usage phase
Document/tool
Commissioning
Documentation scope
In the interests of clarity, this documentation does not contain all the detailed information for
all product types and cannot take into account every possible aspect of installation,
operation, or maintenance.
Target group
This documentation is geared toward machine manufacturers, commissioning personnel and
service personnel who put the SINAMICS GM150 medium-voltage converter into operation
and operate it.
1.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Introduction
1.2 Performing a receiving inspection
Note
Perform each step of the receiving inspection in order to identify major faults or defects
immediately.
10
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.1
2.2
ESD-sensitive components
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
11
Start
Safety Instructions
2.2 ESD-sensitive components
e
f
f
c
(1)
Figure 2-1
a
(2)
f
c
a
(3)
(1)
Sitting
(2)
Standing
(3)
Standing/sitting
12
= conductive floor
= ESD table
= ESD footwear
= ESD coat
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
f
[ID 6006.02]
2.3
Safety concept
2.3.1
Monitoring functions
The medium-voltage converter features hardware and software functions that protect it
against faults and damage caused by impermissible operating statuses or hardware
malfunctions. The control elements are located in the converter cabinet and support internal
microprocess-controlled monitoring and remote device monitoring.
2.3.2
Insulation monitoring
Insulation monitoring
The SINAMICS GM150 converter is operated ground-free via an IT system. This means that
the converter can continue to operate if a ground fault occurs.
NOTICE
A second ground fault causes the converter to fail.
For safety reasons, it is necessary to detect such ground faults, in order to eliminate the risk
of electric shock on the converter. For this reason, the SINAMICS GM150 converter is
equipped with an A-ISOMETER insulation monitor (type IRDH275BM), which continuously
monitors the condition of the converter, including the motor.
Only one insulation monitoring device can be connected to each live connected IT system.
The insulation monitor automatically adjusts monitoring in line with the line discharge
capacitance.
Before carrying out any insulation or voltage testing on the power system, the voltage
monitor's instrument cables must be disconnected for the duration of testing.
The A-ISOMETER Type IRDH275BM is connected between the ungrounded supply and the
equipotential bonding conductor (PE).
Self-test
The A-ISOMETER IRDH275B automatically runs a self-test routine whenever the insulation
resistance of the mains supply > 20 M or every 24 hours if an output relay has been
preselected for system fault signaling.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
13
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Terminal monitoring
The connections to mains and ground (PE) are monitored continuously. If the cables are
interrupted or not connected, or if their resistance is high, this is indicated on the LCD.
In this case, please check the terminal conductors immediately, as the insulation resistance
is not being measured properly.
The insulation resistance can be > 20 M in new or small IT systems. An alarm would also
be output in this case. In this case, terminal monitoring must be deactivated in Setup2.
The insulation monitor monitors the insulation resistance of the converter with respect to two
limit values:
Limit value 1: Insulating resistor < 500 kOhms = Signal 1 (alarm)
Limit value 2: Insulating resistor < 100 kOhms = Signal 2 (fault)
The messages are wired as follows on the terminal strip TM 15, and output as messages to
the AOP30 and the starter.
Signal
Terminal
Message 1
.HC-A11-X522:3
Message 2
.HC-A11-X522:4
For more detailed information on how the A-ISOMETER IRDH275B functions and
instructions on how it is operated, see "Supplementary instructions (options, third-party
suppliers)".
2.3.3
Undervoltage tripping
14
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
2.3.4
Description
The short-circuiter is triggered if an over-voltage occurs due to a serious fault and it cannot
be brought under control by opening the circuit-breaker and unlocking the pulse block of the
machine.
When the short-circuiter thyristors are triggered, the circuit-breaker is always deactivated.
Once the thyristors have been triggered, an acknowledgement signal is output to the closedloop control system. Fiber-optic conductors are used to control gating of the thyristors and
the acknowledgement signals.
The short-circuiter is triggered by the Power Stack Adapter.
WARNING
It takes up to six minutes for the voltages to reach a safe level once the high voltage and
auxiliary voltage have been switched off.
If the short-circuiter is defective, this can significantly increase the discharge time.
Always observe the five safety rules in "Safety information/personnel protection" and in the
converter documentation.
The response voltage depends on the rated output voltage of the converter:
Rated output voltage [kV]
2.3
3.3
4.16
6.0
6.6
7.2
2.2
3.125
4,.4
5.7
6.25
6.8
The resistors absorb the energy stored in the DC link and limit the current. In the event of
false tripping, the torque surge for the machine, which is still rotating, is limited by the
resistors.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
15
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
2.3.5
Description
'5,9(&OL4
'5,9(&OL4
)LEHURSWLFFDEOH
36$
Figure 2-2
&RQWDFWRUFRQWURO
IRU
FLUFXLWEUHDNHUV
2Q2II
&8
36$
2II
The overview diagram shows how central components are networked. The DRIVE-CLiQ
connection between the control unit and the power stack adapter is considered secure
because communication on the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is monitored cyclically.
With regard to contactor control for the circuit breaker, a two-channel bypass to the open
circuits is provided for safety reasons. Refer to the overview diagram for circuit breaker
control in the appendix. This ensures that the circuit breaker opens whenever a fault occurs
within the system, that is, system faults in the control unit or power stack adapter cause the
circuit breaker to trip. A bypass to the circuit breaker is also provided via a fiber-optic ring if
faults occur in other inverter systems.
The following time-coded signals are transmitted via the fiber-optic ring:
Pulse inhibit
Circuit breaker OPEN
Crowbar CLOSED
Arc-through of all IGCTs (only with GM150 IGCT)
2.3.6
16
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Safety Instructions
2.3 Safety concept
Where connected
=.LA-X11:9-10
=.LA-S31:11-12
=.LA-S31:21-22
=.LA-S31:31-32
Circuit breaker
control circuit
=.LA-X11:5-6
=.LA-X11:7-8
=.LA-S31:51-52
=.LA-S31:61-62
Excitation equipment
=.LA-X51:3, 4
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
17
Start
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.1
Commissioning tools
You have two options for commissioning the converter:
1. STARTER commissioning tool
We recommend you use the STARTER commissioning tool and Project Wizard for
easy commissioning.
In this case, you must install the STARTER software, which you can find on the
supplied CD. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled Software
installation (Page 19).
You must also set up a PROFIBUS interface in order to perform the commissioning
with STARTER. For information on how to do so, refer to the section entitled
" Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface (Page 20) ".
2. The AOP operator panel
If you have no PC or programming device (PG), you can perform the commissioning
using the AOP operator panel. In this case, continue with the section entitled
" Commissioning via the operator panel (Page 132) ".
3.2
Software installation
3.2.1
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
19
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Software requirements:
Windows 2000 SP3 or SP4, or
Windows XP Professional SP1 or SP2 or
Windows Server 2003 SP1
Internet Explorer V6.0.
3.2.2
Installing STARTER
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
Introduction
The PROFIBUS connection, diagnostics LEDs, and the PROFIBUS address switch are
located on the Control Unit CU320.
20
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
5'<
'3
237
02'
5'<
'3,
237
02'
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Table 3-1
Pin
Signal name
Description
Range
Not assigned
M24_SERV
0V
RxD/TxDP
RS485
CNTRP
Control signal
TTL
DGND
VP
5 V +- 10%
P24_SERV
24 V (20.4 V 28.8 V)
RxD/TxDN
RS485
Not assigned
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
21
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
CAUTION
No CAN cables may be connected to the X126 interface. If CAN cables are connected, the
CU320 and other CAN bus nodes could be seriously damaged.
Note
A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface (X126) for remote
diagnostics purposes.
The power supply for the teleservice terminals 2 and 7 may have a max. load of 150 mA.
Diagnostics LED
The meaning is explained in the table below.
Table 3-2
Color
Status
-----
Off
Description
Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Note:
PROFIdrive is ready for communication when the Control Unit is ready to operate (DP1
LED is on).
Green
Continuously lit
Green
0.5 Hz flashing
light
Red
Continuously lit
PROFIBUS selector
The PROFIBUS address switch is located under the cover.
Figure 3-3
22
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
3.3.3
Description
The figure below shows suitable PROFIBUS connectors with/without a programming
device/PC connector.
352),%86FRQQHFWRUV
ZLWKRXW3*3&FRQQHFWLRQ
(6%$;$
Figure 3-4
352),%86FRQQHFWRUV
ZLWKSURJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&
FRQQHFWLRQ
(6%%;$
PROFIBUS connectors
Connect the cables to the PROFIBUS connectors, as these connectors contain the
necessary bus terminating resistors.
Connect the cable shield over a wide area on both sides.
/DVWEXVQRGH
RQ
RII
Figure 3-5
RQ
RII
RQ
RII
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
%XVWHUPLQDWLRQ
)URPSUHYLRXV
EXVQRGH
7RQH[W
EXVQRGH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
23
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
Switch the bus terminating resistor on or off depending on its position in the bus,
otherwise the data will not be transmitted properly.
3.3.4
Description
The PROFIBUS address of the Control Unit CU320 must be set for PROFIBUS
communication.
You have two options for setting the PROFIBUS address:
DIP switch on the Control Unit CU320
Parameter p0918 (default setting)
Switch
Significance
S1
20 = 1
S2
21 = 2
S3
22 = 4
S4
23 = 8
S5
24 = 16
S6
25 = 32
S7
26 = 64
24
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.3 Description and configuration of the PROFIBUS interface
6
6
21
6
2))
Example:
Significance
Note
The PROFIBUS address switches have a default setting of 0 or 127 (set via parameter
p0918).
3.3.5
Description
The PROFIBUS master must always send a 1 in the eleventh bit (bit 10) of the first control
word (control by PLC). The process data (PZD) will not otherwise be processed further
internally.
It is not sufficient to interconnect parameter p854 permanently with a 1.
This also applies to slave-to-slave communication between multiple slaves (converter with
DC master as an excitation device...). The eleventh bit (bit 10) must be preset to 1 in the first
control word from the master to the converter. This also applies when no other master
control commands are in use and slaves are communicating by direct slave-to-slave data
exchange only.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
25
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.4 Data backup on the CompactFlash card and firmware update
3.4
3.4.1
Data backup
Data backup
CAUTION
The CompactFlash card must only be inserted or removed when the power is off.
Otherwise there is a risk of data loss or damage to the card,
which would prevent commissioning of the drive.
Only remove or insert the CompactFlash card when the power is switched off.
Check that a CompactFlash card has been inserted into the CPU.
Remove the CompactFlash card from the CPU and back up the data stored on the
card.
Figure 3-6
26
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.5 Switching on the auxiliary power supply
3.4.2
Introduction
When new converter firmware is installed, e.g. by installing a new CompactFlash card, the
firmware for the components is upgraded automatically after switching on.
Description
Automatic firmware upgrade is indicated by the <RDY> LED on the CU flashing
orange/green, and by an LED on the component concerned also flashing.
If the <RDY> LED on the CU flashes rapidly in orange, this indicates that the update is
complete.
CAUTION
During the firmware upgrade, the firmware of the individual components is updated.
Interruptions of the firmware upgrade may cause damage to the components.
Therefore, never interrupt the firmware upgrade process.
3.5
Description
Switch on the 230 V and 24 V auxiliary power supply. When doing so, refer to the
circuit diagram in the "Circuit diagram" section in the Operating Instructions.
Note
System power-up
It can take several minutes for the system to power up.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
27
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6
3.6.1
Figure 3-7
Work area
Explanation
: Toolbar
In this area, you can access frequently used functions by clicking icons.
: Project navigator
The elements and projects available in the project are displayed here.
: Work area
: Detailed view
Detailed information about faults and alarms, for example, is displayed this area.
28
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
29
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click the "Display wizard during start" check box to remove the check mark. The
project wizard then no longer appears the next time the STARTER program is called
up.
Online Help
STARTER features a detailed online Help function. The online Help is automatically
displayed when you start up STARTER.
Figure 3-10
STARTER - Help
30
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
On the "Workbench" tab, click the "Display first steps at the start" check box to remove
the check mark. Now, the STARTER Help wizard will no longer appear the next time
the program is called up.
You can reactivate the online help at any time by selecting menu command "First steps" in
the "Help" menu.
3.6.2
ONLINE MODE
In ONLINE mode, there is a communications link to the drive that enables data exchange.
All parameters are directly read from the drive.
Parameter changes are written to the drive and become immediately effective there.
Parameter sets can be generated by upread.
Parameter sets can be written by download.
Process data can be read and written to (setpoints, actual values, control commands,
etc.).
For further information, refer to the STARTER Help.
In ONLINE mode, you can perform the first commissioning with or without the project wizard.
First commissioning ONLINE with the project wizard.
The drive device, the options, and the infeed are automatically detected by STARTER
and entered into the corresponding dialog screens.
First commissioning ONLINE without the project wizard (Page 60).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
31
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
You must enter the drive device, the options, and the infeed into the corresponding
dialog screens.
OFFLINE Mode
In OFFLINE mode there is no communication link to the drive. Data cannot be exchanged.
All parameters are read from the parameter sets of the project rather than from the drive.
Each drive and each drive component (DO (Control Unit, Motor Module, Terminal
Module) of the SINAMICS drive system have a parameter set.
Parameter changes are written to the parameter set.
Parameter sets cannot be uploaded directly from the device.
Parameter sets cannot be downloaded directly to the device.
Process data cannot be editing (by defining a setpoint and control commands or
acquiring an actual value).
You perform "First commissioning OFFLINE with the project wizard" in OFFLINE mode.
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
Figure 3-11
32
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
33
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS,
Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.
Figure 3-14
34
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-15
Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.
Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
Click on button "Change and test..." and, in the next window, on button "Diagnostics" to
check the interface.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
35
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-16
36
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
STARTER - Summary
Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
37
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.3.2
Figure 3-19
38
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-20
3.6.3.3
Configuring a drive
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
39
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
40
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click on button "Carry out drive configuration".
Figure 3-23
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
41
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-24
42
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
43
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-25
Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".
44
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-26
Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
45
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
46
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-27
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
47
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
48
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-28
49
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-29
50
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.
Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
51
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-30
If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".
52
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-31
In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
53
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-32
STARTER - Summary
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
54
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.3.4
Figure 3-33
STARTER - Download
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
55
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-34
Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
Figure 3-35
NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.
56
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.3.5
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
57
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
58
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-36
Select CDS
Figure 3-37
In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
59
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
Figure 3-38
Figure 3-39
60
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-40
Click on button "Yes" to confirm and automatically select a drive unit for the project.
Figure 3-41
Select the check box for the drive you wish to select.
Click on button "Accept" to add the selected drive to the project.
The following message is displayed
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
61
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-42
Figure 3-43
Note
Topology not recognized
If the topology is not fully recognized various values will be missing, for example:
"Infeed"
"All TM modules"
Drive "VECTORMV"
This is confirmed by viewing the topology:
Click the Setpoint button in the topology view to configure the values.
62
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-44
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
63
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-45
Figure 3-46
64
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-47
Figure 3-48
Double-click "Topology" in the directory tree to view the topology that has
been recognized.
Click on button "Update topology" to display the current data values.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
65
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-49
Topology view
Figure 3-50
Click on button "Diagnostic overview" to view the status of the drive unit components.
Click on button "Load to PG output" to load these settings.
66
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Load to PG output
Figure 3-51
Figure 3-52
Topology output
Figure 3-53
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
67
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Messages
Figure 3-54
STARTER - Messages
3.6.4.2
Conditions for carrying out basic drive unit configuration with the drive navigator
Before starting basic drive configuration with the drive navigator you have to:
Go offline
Load the data to the programming device when going offline
Save the STARTER project
Save the data from RAM to ROM when going offline
68
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-55
In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
Double-click on "Drive navigator".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
69
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-56
Figure 3-57
70
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-58
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
71
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-59
72
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
73
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-60
Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".
74
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-61
Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
75
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
76
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-62
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
77
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
78
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-63
79
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-64
If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".
80
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-65
In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
81
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-66
STARTER - Summary
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
82
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.4.3
Figure 3-67
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
83
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-68
Starter - Download
Figure 3-69
Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
Figure 3-70
A confirmation prompt is displayed, confirming that the data have been successfully
transferred to the target device.
84
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-71
NOTICE
The Online/offline comparison window may be displayed again (for example, if the status
reports that quick commissioning of the infeed was not completed).
Close the window.
Select command "Copy RAM to ROM" in the "Target system" menu to save
the drive data to the CompactFlash card or
Click on icon "Copy RAM to ROM" to save the data to the CompactFlash
card.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
85
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select your project in the project navigator of the Starter user interface. With
the right mouse button, click on "Infeed_1" and select the expert list in the
shortcut menu.
Conclude quick commissioning by setting parameter P3900=3.
Figure 3-72
Figure 3-73
Note
Updating the parameter settings
Key parameters are updated when quick commissioning is finished.
Figure 3-74
To conclude the configuration of the new STARTER project with the new settings:
86
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
1. Disconnect STARTER from the target system.
2. Save the data from RAM to ROM.
3. Load the data to the programming device and save the project.
4. Reboot the system.
3.6.4.4
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
87
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
88
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
89
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-75
Select CDS
Figure 3-76
In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".
90
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
3.6.5
3.6.5.1
Figure 3-77
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
91
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-78
Figure 3-79
92
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
The online connection to the drive unit can only be established via PROFIBUS.
Click on button "Change and test..." to set the interface according to your device
configuration.
Figure 3-80
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
93
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-81
Select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box and make the desired settings in
the appropriate drop down list "Timeout","Transmission rate", "Highest station address"
and "Profile".
NOTICE
You must select the "PG/PC is only master on bus" check box if no other master (PC, S7,
etc.) is available on the bus.
Note
Projects can be created and PROFIBUS addresses can be assigned for the drive objects
even if no PROFIBUS interface has been installed on the PC.
To prevent bus addresses from being assigned more than once, only the bus addresses
available in the project are proposed.
Click on button "OK" to confirm the settings and to return to the project wizard.
94
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-82
Click on button "Continue >" to insert a drive unit in the project wizard.
Figure 3-83
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
95
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Choose the following data from the selection fields:
Device: Sinamics
Type: GM150
Bus address: Converter bus address
The bus address has to match the address set on the CU320 using the address
switch. Further information can be found in the "Commissioning (software)" section
of the "PROFIBUS connection" chapter.
Enter a name for the drive unit in the "Name" input field.
Click on button "Insert".
Figure 3-84
The selected drive unit is displayed in the preview window of the project wizard.
Click on button "Continue >".
An overview of the selected project data is displayed.
96
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-85
STARTER - Summary
Click on button "Finish" to finish creating a new project for the drive unit.
3.6.5.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
97
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-86
In the project navigator, click the plus sign next to the drive unit that you would like to
configure.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
The options for configuring the drive unit appear as a directory tree under the selected
drive unit.
Double-click on "Configure drive unit".
98
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-87
Select the correct voltage from the "Motor voltage" drop down list.
Select the correct cooling method from the "Cooling method" drop down list.
Note
With this step, you preselect the cabinet devices that are displayed in the "Drive units
selection" box.
You do not yet define the supply voltage at this point.
In the list under Drive unit selection, select the drive unit based on the ordering no.
(The ordering no. can be found on the rating plate of your converter).
Select the required "Default macro".
This default macro can be used for specific wiring configurations. Further information is
given in the "Parameters for signal interconnection" section of the Appendix.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
99
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Click on button "Continue >".
Select options
Figure 3-88
In the "Options selection" box, select the options that belong to your drive unit. To do
this, click on the check box of the relevant options, as per the rating plate.
The motor reactor value must be entered in p0353.
Note
In the starter, only those options that are software-relevant are listed.
100
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
NOTICE
If you plan to use a sinus filter (option Y15) it is imperative that you select the check box
for this option.
Compare your options carefully to the options specified on the rating plate.
The project wizard establishes internal interconnections based on the selected
options. It is not possible therefore to change the selected options later via the "
< Back " button.
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the
project navigator and add a new one.
Check the options you have selected carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-89
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
101
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Enter the supply voltage in the "Device connection voltage" input field.
When you enter the device supply voltage, always enter the total input terminal voltage.
For instance, a 24-pulse 7.2 kV converter corresponds to a supply voltage of 4 x 1,850
V = 7,400 V. If this is not taken into consideration when entering the device supply
voltage, the default control parameters will be incorrect.
Select the frequency from the "Rated supply frequency" drop down list.
Click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-90
102
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Specify the type of control:
P1300 = 0: Simple V/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 2: Simple V/f control with quadratic characteristic curve
P1300 = 18: Simple I/f control with linear characteristic curve
P1300 = 20: Closed-loop speed control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 21: Closed-loop speed control with a rotary encoder
P1300 = 22: Torque control without a rotary encoder
P1300 = 23: Torque control with a rotary encoder
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are primarily intended for commissioning purposes. They are not
really suitable for ordinary operation. This is due to the fact that large motors tend to
vibrate if operated purely under controlled conditions. The dynamics are also very poor
and there is a high risk of stalling. Therefore, only modes 20 to 23 should be used.
Click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-91
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
103
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the standard that applies to your motor from the "Standard" drop down list:
IEC motor [50 Hz/kW]: Line frequency 50 Hz, motor data input in kW
NEMA [60 Hz/hp]: line frequency 60 Hz, motor data entry in hp.
In the connection voltage input field, enter the value of the DC-link voltage for your
device. Normally, the supply voltage of the Motor Module is calculated as 1.414 x
supply voltage of the infeed.
Click on button "Continue >".
For example, to determine the required supply voltage (DC link voltage for the drive/vector object):
10,465 V = 1.414 x device supply voltage (7,400 V)
NOTICE
The value for the supply voltage should not be changed at a later point.
104
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-92
Enter a name of your choice for the motor in the "Motor name" input field.
Select the motor for your drive unit from the "Motor type" drop down list. If you do not
select a motor type, you will not be able to exit this screen.
Click on button "Continue >".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
105
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-93
Enter the motor data as per the motor type specifications on the rating plate of the
motor in the "Value" input field.
The number of pole pairs is calculated automatically from p0310/p0311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in error message 7950 when commissioning is
completed. The suspected incorrect parameter is shown in the appendage.
The error could be due to:
p0307 >= 1.7321 * p0304 * p0305 *p308
No motor selected (p0300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low
For the induction motor, it is very important to enter the correct rated motor speed
P0311 to assess the motor data.
If necessary, activate the check box "Use or change available optional data?".
106
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If necessary, activate the check box "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit
diagram data?". Enter the required data:
Rating plate data:
p304, p305, p307, p310, p311
Optional data:
p0322 = maximum motor speed
If p322 is entered, you cannot select a technological maximum speed in p1082
that exceeds p0322. Likewise, the current limit in p0640 cannot exceed p0323, if
p0323 > 0. These parameters are primarily designed to protect the motor.
p0323 = maximum motor current
p0341 = motor moment of inertia
Parameters p0341 and p0342 are required for acceleration precontrol and for
encoderless operation. If these parameters are left blank, then estimated values
are derived from p0341 on the basis of the rating plate data.
p0342 = moment of inertia ratio
p0352 = cable resistance
It is particularly important to enter line parameters p0352 and p0353 if there are
long supply cables between the converter and the motor.
p0353 = cable inductance
ECD data:
p0350 = motor stator resistance, cold
p0354 = motor rotor resistance, cold
p0356 = motor stator leakage inductance
p0358 = motor rotor leakage inductance
p0360 = motor magnetizing inductance
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If
the values for a delta connection are the only data available, all 5 parameters must be
divided by a factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically. Correct
entry of the ECD data has a beneficial influence on the control characteristics. In
particular, the speed and torque can be estimated far more accurately during
encoderless operation. If the main inductance p0360 is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current p0320 can be entered instead. This also allows for better
estimation of the parameters. The resulting magnetizing current, calculated on the
basis of the data entered, is displayed in r0331.
NOTICE
You should only select the "Do you want to enter the equivalent circuit diagram data?"
check box if the data sheet with equivalent circuit diagram data is available.
If you do not enter all the required data, you will not be able to exit the screen.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
107
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-94
108
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In "Calculation of the motor/controller data", select the appropriate default settings for
your device configuration. Activate the appropriate radio button as required
Radio button "No calculation"
No controller / limitation parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be
calculated. All data are available and have been entered.
Radio button "Complete calculation without equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data must be entered; the controller and limitation
parameters or equivalent circuit diagram data will be calculated from the ECD
and rating plate data entered
Radio button "Complete calculation with equivalent circuit diagram data"
The equivalent circuit diagram data and controller / limitation parameters will be
calculated only from the rating plate data.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
109
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-95
110
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-96
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
111
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
By default, only "CDS 0" is assigned as a default setting of the command sources.
NOTICE
Make sure that the selected default settings correspond to the actual system configuration.
Once you have selected a pre-assignment macro, you cannot change it later via the
"< Back" button!
If you have made an incorrect entry, you have to delete the entire drive unit from the project
navigator and insert a new one.
Check your default selections carefully and then click on button "Continue >".
Figure 3-97
112
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
If PROFIBUS is being used to control the drive then you can enter the appropriate
telegram type here. If the programming device or the PC with STARTER is the only
PROFIBUS partner, then you need to select "Free telegram configuration with BICO"
(factory setting) from the drop down list.
Click "Continue >".
Figure 3-98
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
113
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In input fields
"Current limit",
"Minimum speed",
"Maximum speed",
"Ramp-up time",
"Ramp-down time",
"Ramp-down time with OFF3"
, enter the values of the most important parameters.
Note
STARTER displays tooltips if you move your cursor over the required field without clicking it.
If you have activated the calculation function (complete calculation with/without equivalent
circuit diagram data), the motor current limit and maximum speed are overwritten when the
parameters are loaded to the target device unless you have disabled them in the disable list.
114
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Figure 3-99
STARTER - Summary
A summary of the data is displayed in this menu. You can save this data to the clipboard for
subsequent use in a text editor.
Click on button "Copy text to clipboard" to transfer your drive unit data summary
displayed in the window for later use in a word-processing program.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
115
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.5.3
116
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Next, transfer the configuration data of your project to the drive unit.
To transfer the STARTER project that was created offline to the drive unit:
1. Establish a connection to the target system
2. Download the project to the target system
3. Save the project in the target system
Click on the "Load project to target system" icon to transfer the data of
your project to the target system.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
117
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
If there is more than one drive listed in the project navigator, then clicking on "Download to
target system" loads the data to all devices.
Clicking "Download" only loads the data for the device that is selected.
Click on button "OK" to save the project data on the programming device/PC.
Alternatively, you may also save the data via the menu.
118
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
NOTICE
The project has now been loaded to the drive unit.
The data is currently only stored in the temporary memory of the drive unit and not on the
CompactFlash card.
Save your project data on the CompactFlash card of your drive unit as described under
"Saving project data in the target system" to avoid losing data during a power outage.
After the data have been loaded to the target device, various calculations are performed on
the CU.
These calculations mean that the online and offline parameters are no longer identical.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
119
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
120
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
3.6.5.4
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
121
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Place the medium-voltage switch in TEST position before commissioning, or switch the
medium-voltage power supply off to ensure that the medium-voltage switch can be
isolated from the power supply.
Check the default values and adjust them to match the switch data if necessary.
122
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
123
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
In the selection list of the command and setpoint sources, select the source, e.g.,
terminal block, fixed setpoint, etc.
Click on button "Execute". (The command and setpoint sources reset to "No
selection").
Click on button "Close".
Save your project to hard disk by selecting command "Save" in the "Project" menu.
3.6.6
Vector
Click on the adjacent icon.
The "Compare" window opens.
124
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
You can choose whether to compare the online data with the project that is currently
loaded or with the default parameters in the "Objects to compare" drop-down list.
Click on button "Display filters" to select the columns you want to include in the
comparison.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
125
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
126
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
A list of results listing the differences found is displayed.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
127
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
You can print out the comparion results. To do this, click on button "Print comparison
results".
3.6.7
Saving a project
Backup options
There are two ways of backing up projects to prevent data loss.
To be able to use the best method of restoring your data in any given situation, it is advisable
to back up your data using both methods.
Archiving a project
This backup method saves your project as a zip file, making it easy to use it with another
drive, for example.
Go offline.
Select the "Archive..." command in the "Project" menu.
128
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the project that you want to archive (project test27 in the example shown).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
129
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Select the folder where you want to archive the project (starter_projects in the example
shown).
The project is then saved as an archive and can be uncompressed and restored as and
when needed.
130
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.6 The STARTER Commissioning Tool
Note
All data in the target directory selected will be deleted before the XML export. Make sure that
no subdirectories or files in the target directory are open on other applications (e.g.
displaying the directory in Windows Explorer). If they are, close the application and restart
the XML export.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
131
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Click on the link highlighted in blue to obtain more detailed information about the project that
has been exported. This requires a program capable of displaying XML files (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer).
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
Description
You can use the advanced operator panel (AOP30) for commissioning, operating, and
diagnosing the converter.
The AOP30 communicates with the SINAMICS drive via a serial RS232 interface with PPI
protocol. The interface is a point-to-point connection. During communication, the AOP30 is
the master and the connected drive is the slave.
132
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
2SHUDWLQJVWDWXV
/('V
21JUHHQ
$ODUP\HOORZ
)DXOWUHG
IXQFWLRQNH\V
0HQXNH\
0DVWHUFRQWURO
VHOHFWLRQ
.H\ERDUGLQWHUORFN
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
FKDQJHRYHU
,QFUHDVHGHFUHDVH
1XPHULFNH\SDG
212))
-RJJLQJ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
133
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.1.2
/2&$/
5(027(
Switches between remote and local mode. In local mode, the LED
illuminates.
More detailed information is available in Chapter Control Settings.
On/off button.
The "On" key is always in effect in local mode, if no inhibit function is
activated.
The "Off" key is only active in local mode and acts as "OFF1" in the
default setting. More detailed information is available in Chapter Control
Settings.
Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover. The key is only in effect in
local mode.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter Control Settings.
The key is only in effect in local mode in "Ready to switch on" status
(not
when "operating").
The speed that is set in parameter p1058 is approached.
134
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
)
Function keys.
These keys have different functions depending on the menu. The
respective function appears in plain text above the key.
See also
Control settings (Page 148)
3.7.1.3
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
135
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
$NWXHOOH6WUXQJHQ
+DXSWPHQ
$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
$OWH6WUXQJHQ
+LOIH
$OWH:DUQXQJHQ
6HO3DU
*UXQGLQEHWULHEQDKPH
%HWULHEVPDVNH
QGHUQ
.RPSOHWWLQEHWULHEQDKPH
0RWRULGHQWLILNDWLRQ
'LDJ
/IWHUODXI]HLW]XUFNVHW]HQ
%HUHLW
(LQ]HOQHV'2
$OOH'2
*HUWHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
3DUDPHWHUUHVHW
3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
3HUPDQHQWH
3DUDPHWHUEHUQDKPH
6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
6WUVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XUFNVHW]HQ
$QWULHEV
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH
*HUWH
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
$23
(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
%DWWHULH]XVWDQG
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
7DVWDWXUWHVW
$23
'LDJQRVH
/('7HVW
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ
3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNOVFKHQ
6SUDFKH
136
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
581
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
$/$50
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
)$8/7
0DVNH7\S
0DVNH:HUWH
F1
+LOIH
%DONHQ
QGHUQ
F4
F3
F2
]XUFN
F5
Changing a parameter
Observe the functions assigned to the function keys (1), which can differ from menu to menu
(e.g., function key F5 is assigned to the function OK or Change)
Using the function keys , , , select the parameter that you want to change.
In order to change the selected parameter you must activate the parameter according
to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
Use either the numeric keypad or the function keys
, , , to modify the selected parameter.
You must confirm the change according to the menu.
Do this by pressing the OK function key.
Click the Back, function key to scroll back in the main menu, or
click the Menu function key to switch directly to the main menu.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
137
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Press the Back function key to exit the Help function.
3.7.2
First commissioning and basic parameter assignment with the AOP30 operator
panel
3.7.2.1
Introduction
During the initial commissioning of the converter, the first operating step is to set the
language. Then carry out the basic parameterization. The input of parameters is done in
seven or eight menus (depending on whether you want to enter equivalent circuit diagram
parameters).
Only when all of the parameters necessary for the initial commissioning have been set, no
more initial commissioning will be performed. Regardless of whether the parameterization
was carried out at the AOP or using the STARTER.
You can skip the menu-driven initial commissioning using the Menu key. The main menu
appears. By selecting the menu item Commissioning/Service - Drive Commissioning Complete Commissioning you can start the initial commissioning. When Complete
commissioning is selected, the parameterization of the infeed is omitted. The parameters
listed in section Basic Parameterization must be reparameterized during the Complete
Commissioning in the parameter list of the B_Infeed.
138
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.2.2
Introduction
The parameters that can be entered during the basic parameterization are listed in the
following. Depending on the configuration of the drive, not all of the parameters have to have
assigned values.
p6677
p6678
p6679
p6680
p6681
p6682
Parameter
Parameter text
p100
p300[0]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
139
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
motor parameter
For safe operation, some important parameters must be entered.
Table 3-6
Parameter
Parameter text
p304[0]
p305[0]
p307[0]
p308[0]
p309[0]
p311[0]
p335[0]
p388[0]
Exciter-Rated voltage
p389[0]
p390[0]
140
p320[0]
p322[0]
p341[0]
p342[0]
p350[0]
p352[0]
Cable resistance
p354[0]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter
Parameter text
p356[0]
p358[0]
p360[0]
Table 3-8
Parameter
Parameter text
p350[0]
p354[0]
p356[0]
p358[0]
p359[0]
p360[0]
p361[0]
p362[0]
p363[0]
p364[0]
p365[0]
p366[0]
p367[0]
p368[0]
p369[0]
p1625[0]
p346[0]
Note
If you select the line Back in this menu, the Motor standard/Motor type menu is called up.
Encoder commissioning
Table 3-9
Parameter
Parameter text
p400[0]
p404[0]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
141
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter
Parameter text
p405[0]
p408[0]
p491
Basic Commissioning
Table 3-10
Parameter
Parameter text
p700[0]
p1000[0]
p1070[0]
p1080[0]
Minimum speed
p1082[0]
Maximum speed
p1120[0]
p1121[0]
p1135[0]
Message overview
In this menu, faults and alarms of the individual drive objects are displayed.
Acknowledging faults:
Using the function keys or , select the desired entry.
Press the Tools key and select Acknowledge. (If you do not want to acknowledge the
fault, select Back).
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
Opens the operation screen menu:
If no faults are present, press the Tools key and select Back.
Confirm the selection by pressing the OK function key.
The Operation screen menu is called up.
142
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Note
Depending on the configuration of your drive, additional settings are still necessary.
3.7.3
Parameterization errors
Description
If an error occurs when reading or writing parameters, this is indicated by a message in the
display of the AOP.
3.7.4
Description
When parameters are changed, the new values are first saved in volatile memory (RAM). If
the changed values cannot be permanent saved, they are lost when the converter is
switched off. If changed values are not yet saved to the CompactFlash card, an "S" flashes
in the top right of the display
3.7.5
3.7.5.1
Description
Depending on the type of drive, an operation screen with 10 different display parameters is
the default.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
143
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
9(&725$86
9B'&
9
$867
3:,5.
N:
7B/7
r&
,4,67
$HII
+LOIH
,B,67
)B$86
/7,7
,',67
8B$86
QGHUQ
$HII
+]
$HII
9HII
'LDJ
6HO3DU
You can define the display of the operation screen to suit yourself in 5 types of display
(screen 2). The following types of display are available:
Values
Bar
mixed
Values type display:
2 digital values
10 values
The order of the entries in this screen determines the order of the operating variables
(parameters) displayed in the operation screen.
Bar type display:
3 bars
Mixed type display:
8 values/1 bars
4 values/2 bars
Order of the display: First come the parameters that are to be displayed digitally, then the
parameters that are to be displayed as bars.
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH
DNWLY
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
0DVNH7\S
+LOIH
:HUWH%DONHQ
]XUFN
QGHUQ
144
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the active setting.
Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 and then, using the Change
function key, select the desired type of display.
Using the or function keys, select the entry Screen2 Values and then, using the
Change function key, activate the setting.
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
0DVNH
DNWLY
%HWULHEVPDVNH7\S
0DVNH7\S
0DVNH:HUWH
+LOIH
:HUWH%DONHQ
]XUFN
QGHUQ
3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU
U
, B ,67
U
$8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO
, B LVW
%HWUDJ
]XUFN
JO
QGHUQ
Using the or function keys, select the first parameter and then activate the setting
using the Change function key. The display changes to the menu for selecting the
DriveObject.
%HWULHEVPDVNH
U
3%62// 3%3='HPSI9RU
%,&2'2
$XVZDKO
&8
U
*0
%
UB,1)12
9(&72509
U
+LOIH
, B ,67
, B LVW
%HWUDJ
JO
$8667 $XVVWHXHUJUDG JO
)B $86 $ QWU IB $XVJ JOD
$EEUXFK
2.
Using the function keys or , select the desired DO and confirm the setting by
pressing the OK key. The menu Selection parameters appears.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
145
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
%HWULHEVPDVNH
&8B*0$XVZDKO3DUDPHWHU
$ OOH3DUDPHWHU
U 3%3='HPSI:RU W
+LOIH
]XUFN
2.
+LOIH
,B,67
)B$86
QGHUQ
$HII
+]
6HO3DU
'LDJ
Signal
Parameters
Short name
Unit
Scaling (100 % =
...)
r1114
NSETP
1/min
p2000
r0024
F_OUT
Hz
Reference
frequency
r0032
P_ACT
kW
r2004
r0026
UDC
p2001
DO: Vector MV
Factory setting (entry no.)
146
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Signal
Parameters
Short name
Unit
Scaling (100 % =
...)
r0021
N_ACT
1/min
p2000
r0027
I_IST
p2002
r0035
T_MOT
Reference
temperature
r0037
T_LT
Reference
temperature
r0031
M_ACT
Nm
p2003
r0025
C_OUT
p2001
r0020
NSETP
1/min
p2000
r0028
Reference control
factor
r0029
p2002
r0030
p2002
Converter overload
Degree of thermal overload
r0036
100 % = Shutdown
r0061
N_ACT
1/min
p2000
r0062
N_ACT
1/min
p2000
r0063
N_ACT
1/min
p2000
Control deviation
r0064
1/min
p2000
Slip frequency
r0065
Hz
Reference
frequency
Output frequency
r0066
Hz
Reference
frequency
Output voltage
r0072
p2001
Control factor
r0074
Reference control
factor
r0078
p2002
UACT
r0080
Nm
p2003
r1024
1/min
p2000
r1050
1/min
p2000
r1119
1/min
p2000
r1508
Nm
p2003
r1482
Nm
p2003
PROFIBUS setpoint
r2050
1/min
p2000
r0033
MUTIL
Motor temperature
r0035
T_MOT
Torque utilization
r0081
MUTIL
Speed setpoint
r1169
NSETP
1/min
p2000
r1170
NSETP
1/min
p2000
2050
PBSOL
r0026
V DC
p2001
DO: CU_GM
Profibus setpoint
DO: B_InfMV
Vdc smooth
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
147
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Signal
Parameters
Short name
Unit
r0037
LT T
C
Hz
Line frequency
r66
fLine
Profibus setpoint
r2050
PBSOL
Profibus setpoint
r2050
PBSOL
r4052
AI_UI
Analog inputs %
r4055
AI_%
Scaling (100 % =
...)
DO: TM31
Scaling
Table 3-12
Scaling
Variable
Scaling parameter
Reference speed
100 % = p2000
Reference voltage
100 % = p2001
p2001 = 1000 V
Reference current
100 % = p2002
Reference torque
100 % = p2003
Reference power
100 % = r2004
Reference frequency
Reference control factor 100 % = Maximum output voltage without
overload
Reference flux
Reference temperature
100% = 100C
3.7.5.2
Control settings
Description
You can set the control keys of the AOP as desired.
Press the Menu key.
Using the function keys or , select the Commissioning/service entry. Press the OK
function key and use the function key to select the AOP settings entry. From this
menu, use the function key to select the entry Control settings The display changes
to the Control settings menu.
148
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
/RNDO0RGHVSHLFKHUQ DNWLY
$XVLQ5HPRWH
1HLQ
/2&$/5(027(DXFKLP%HWULHE
5RWH$867DVWHZLUNWDOV
+LOIH
QGHUQ
1HLQ
1HLQ
$86
]XUFN
Using the or function keys, select the desired entry and change it using the Change
key.
Confirm the entries using the Back function key.
You can find the description and setting options for the individual menu items in the
following.
Off in remote
Setting Yes:
It is possible to switch off via the OFF key in remote mode
Setting No:
OFF key not in effect in remote mode.
In LOCAL MODE, the OFF key is always in effect.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
149
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Clockwise/counter-clockwise switchover
Setting Yes:
In LOCAL MODE, left/right switching is possible using the
key.
150
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
During the switchover from remote to local mode with the drive switched on (motor
running) the current actual value is set as the AOP setpoint.
See also
The keys of the AOP30 (Page 134)
3.7.5.3
Inhibit functions
Introduction
For protection against unintentional, improper setting of the parameters or accidental use of
the control keys, you can enable various inhibit functions.
%HGLHQVSHUUH
6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ
3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH
=XJULIIVWXIH
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
151
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Press the key with the key symbol.
6LFKHUKHLWVVSHUUHQ
%HGLHQVSHUUH
3DUDPHWULHUVSHUUH
=XJULIIVWXIH
+LOIH
QLFKWBDNWLY
QLFKWBDNWLY
6WDQGDUG
]XUFN
QGHUQ
QGHUQ
QGHUQ
Parameterization inhibit
Against unauthorized parameterization (password-protected)
It is possible to control the drive.
Using the function keys or , select the parameterization inhibit function.
152
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Using the Change function key, select the active or not active setting.
active.
A window appears on the display for inputting and confirming a password. Enter an
ID number (up to 7 digits).
The contents of parameters can be viewed, but not saved. If you want to save a
parameter, this message appears: Parameterization inhibit - no control command
acceptance.
The control keys are not inhibited.
The inhibit is indicated by the key symbol
.
If you have forgotten the password, you can switch off the parameterization inhibit as
follows:
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Pull out the RS232 data cable.
3. Switch on the power supply and press and hold the key with the key symbol for 20
seconds. The key symbol
extinguishes.
not active
No restriction of operation.
Save the setting by pressing the Back function key.
Access level
The scope of the displayed parameters conforms to the set access level.
The access level determines which parameters can be displayed and changed.
The higher the access level, the more functions are available.
The following access levels are possible:
Access level
Functions
1: Default
2: Extended
3: Expert
4: Special access
In this access level, additional menu entries and parameters are displayed. A
password is required upon activation. Enter the password "2816."
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
153
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.6
3.7.6.1
3.7.6.2
Operation screen
$NWXHOOH
6WUXQJHQ
6HO3DU
$NWXHOOH
:DUQXQJHQ
QGHUQ
$OWH6WUXQJHQ
'LDJ
$OWH:DUQXQJHQ
+DXSWPHQ
%HWULHEVPDVNH
+LOIH
154
QGHUQ
,B,67
)B$86
/7,7
,',67
8B$86
6HO3DU
$HII
+]
$HII
9HII
'LDJ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Operation screen
Further settings
You can adjust the shape of the display and the displayed values to your liking. You can find
more detailed information on this in the section Defining Operation Screens.
Function
Sel. Par.
Help
Call up of an explanatory help text for the selected display. This help text
describes which parameter of the display forms the basis, for example.
change
Diag.
Current faults
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active faults.
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.
Press the Ack. function key to acknowledge the fault.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
155
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Current alarms
This menu shows the number and title of the currently active alarms.
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.
Old faults
This menu displays the number and titles of the old faults. The top line shows the total
number of faults and the time of the fault (time at which the fault occurred). The faults are
displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged fault messages by selecting
older or newer.
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the fault.
Old alarms
This menu displays the number and titles of the old alarms. The top line shows the total
number of alarms and the time of the alarm (time at which the alarm occurred). The alarms
are displayed in ascending order in separate screens.
Press the Tools key. Call up the chronologically arranged alarms by selecting older or
newer.
3.7.6.3
Press the Help function key to call up information on clearing the alarm.
Parameterization
+DXSWPHQ
(LQ]HOQHV'2
$OOH'2
3DUDPHWULHUXQJ
'DWHQVDW]DXVZDKO
3HUPDQHQWH
3DUDPHWHUEHUQDKPH
156
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Individual DO
The parameter lists for the individual DriveObjects can be opened in the displayed menu.
Using the function keys or , select the desired DO and confirm the selection with OK
.
Select the desired parameters using the or function keys or by entering the
parameter number at the keypad.
Note
Parameters with identical functions may exist with the same parameter number in more than
one drive object, e.g. p0005.
By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.
All DOs
In this menu, a numerically sorted list of the parameters of all of the DOs is displayed. In this
list, the same parameter number can appear several times. At the top left, you see the
number of the DO to which the parameter belongs in brackets.
Select the desired parameters using the or function keys or by entering the
parameter number on the keypad. Parameters with identical functions may exist with
the same parameter number in more than one drive object, e.g. p0005.
By pressing the Change function key, you can open a change window of the
parameter. Here, you can change the parameter by assigning values or by making a
selection from a list.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for the selected parameter.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
157
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+LOIH
F
G
P
]XUFN
2.
command data set that must be enabled for setting the relevant main setpoint is
indicated in the square parentheses of the parameter []. In the factory setting, command data
set 0 is active.
158
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.6.4
Fault/alarm memory
6WUVSHLFKHU
:DUQXQJVVSHLFKHU
Alarm overview
If a fault occurs, the drive displays the fault and/or alarm on the operator panel in the Alarm
overview.
Every fault and alarm is entered in the fault/alarm buffer along with time the error occurred
and the time it was rectified. The time stamp relates to the relative system time in
milliseconds (r0969).
The diagram below shows that currently at least one active fault/alarm is present for the
"VECTOR" drive object. The two other drive objects are fault-free.
$ODUPRYHUYLHZ
&8B*
9(&725
70
)DXOW
$ODUP
7RROV
'LDJ
By pressing the Diag. key, you call up the Display diagnostics key. In this menu, you
can display the current and old faults and alarms.
^9(&725`'LDJQRVHDQ]HLJHQ
$NWXHOOH6WUXQJHQ
$NWXHOOH:DUQXQJHQ
DOWH6WUXQJHQ
DOWH:DUQXQJHQ
=XUFN
2.
You can find further information on alarms and faults in chapter "Operation Screens".
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
159
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the drive indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
The list of faults and alarms indicates the type of response (OFF1, OFF2, and so on) for
each fault message.
Displaying faults
Faults are displayed by the red FAULT LED. Any faults that have occurred are automatically
displayed. Up to eight faults occurring at the same time are displayed.
Using the function keys or , select the fault.
You can acknowledge the fault by pressing the Ack. function key. The operation screen
is displayed.
Using the Help function key, you can call up the information for clearing the fault.
9(&7256WUXQJHQ
)
)
+LOIH
+DXSWQHW]VFKDOWHUB
(UGVFKOXVV6WUXQJ
]XU FN
4XLWW
What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the drive. It does not result in the
drive being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.
Displaying alarms
Alarms are indicated by the yellow ALARM LED. In addition, a corresponding note regarding
the cause will be displayed on the operator panel. Up to eight faults occurring at the same
time are displayed.
160
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
9(&725:DUQXQJHQ
+
(UGVFKOXVVZDUQXQJDNWLY
]XU FN
+LOIH
&OHDU
3.7.6.5
+DXSWPHQ
,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH
$QWULHEV
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
.RPSOHWW
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
0RWRU
LGHQGLILNDWLRQ
/IWHUODXI]HLW
]XUFNVHW]HQ
Basic Commissioning
In this menu, the following parameters can be set:
Table 3-13
Parameter
Parameter text
p700[0]
p1000[0]
p1070[0]
p1080[0]
Minimum speed
p1082[0]
Maximum speed
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
161
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter
Parameter text
p1120[0]
p1121[0]
p1135[0]
These are the parameters that are entered in the basic parameterization. Also see chapter
"Basic Parameterization with the AOP30".
Complete commissioning
In this menu, all of the parameters of the basic parameterization except for the parameters of
the DO B_Infeed can be set. More detailed information is available in Chapter "Basic
Parameterization with the AOP30".
Motor Identification
This function has not yet been implemented and will be made available at a later point in
time.
6WXQGHQ
/DXI ]HLWU FNVHW ]HQ
+LOIH
]XUFN
2.
162
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.6.6
%HUHLW
*HUWH
LQEHWULHEQDKPH
,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH
*HUWHNRQILJXUDWLRQ
)HVWOHJXQJ$QWULHEVW\S
$QWULHEVEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
'DWHQEDVLVNRQILJXUDWLRQ
3DUDPHWHUUHVHW
+LOIH
]XUFN
2.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
163
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Using the function keys or , select the desired parameter and confirm with the OK
key.
0: Ready = The device commissioning is concluded.
1: Device configuration = At the first commissioning of the devices, after run-up, the
device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the internal automatic first
commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for
the actual topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology
(p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single index value of p0099[x] the same
as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried-out, in this
state, when required, other basic device configuration parameters can be adapted
(e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
2: Determining drive type = The drive object types and/or the function modules for
individual drive objects can be changed or selected. To this end, the drive object
type can be set via p0107[0...15] and the function module can be set via
p0108[0...15] (see p0101[0...15])
3: Drive basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling
times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
4. Data basic configuration = After the device has been commissioned for the first
time, for the individual drive objects changes can be made regarding the
assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the
individual data sets and the assignment of the power module, motor and encoder to
the drive data sets (p0185, and onwards).
30: parameter reset = In order to bring the complete unit into the "first
commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved with p0977, p0009 must first
be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
You will find a list of the settable parameters below
p0092
164
p0097
r0098[0]
p0099[0]
p0101[0]
p0978[0]
p2042
PROFIBUS ID Number
p9904
p9905
Device specialization
p9906
p9907
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter
Parameter text
p9908
p9909
p9910
p9915
p9916
P0103[0]
Application-specific view
p0107[0]
p0108[0]
p0112
p0115[0]
r0116[0][
Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object
p0120
p0130
p0140
p0170
p0180
r6672[0]
r6673[0]
p6674[0]
p6675[0]
p6681[0]
p6683[0]
p0112
p0115[0]
p0120
p0170
r6672[0]
r6673[0]
p6674[0]
p6675[0]
p6681[0]
p6683[0]
DO B_Inf
DO CU-GM
p0115[0]
r0116[0][
Drive object clock recommended, changes only for current drive object
p0799
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
165
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Parameter
Parameter text
P4099
r0197
Loader 1 version
r0198
Loader 2 version
p0121[0]
r0126[0]
p0131[0]
p0141[0]
p0142[0]
p0145[0]
p0146[0]
DO VECTORMV
p0186[0]
p0187[0]
p0188[0]
p0189[0]
p0151
Note
Changing the access levels
When you change the access level (e.g., from access level 2 to access level 3), you must
select in a intermediate step status 0: Ready. You can find additional information on the
access levels in Chapter: Inhibit Functions in Section Access Levels.
3.7.6.7
166
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
+DXSWPHQ
6WHXHUXQJVHLQVWHOOXQJHQ
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH
%HWULHEVPDVNHGHILQLHUHQ
$23
(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
'DWXP8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQ]XUFNVHW]HQ
Control settings
In this menu, you can set the functions that the control keys of the AOP should carry out. For
example, you can select whether the OFF key of the AOP is assigned the function OFF1,
OFF2 or OFF3.
More detailed information is available in Chapter "Control settings".
Display settings
In this menu, you can make the following AOP settings:
Illumination (on, off after 2 minutes, off)
intensity of illumination
Contrast
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
167
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
'LVSOD\HLQVWHOOXQJHQ
(LQ
%HOHXFKWXQJ
%HOHXFKWXQJVVWUNH
.RQWUDVW
]XUFN
QGHUQ
8KU]HLWHLQVWHOOHQ
'DWXPWWPPMMMM
=HLW66PPVV
6\QFKURQLVDWLRQ
&
NHLQH
VSHLFKHUQ
$EEUXFK
168
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Select the synchronization line. Make the desired setting.
None
The AOP time is managed internally and displayed in the upper right of the
operating screen. It has no function other than this
AOPDRIVE
The AOP time is recorded in the drive each time the AOP is powered up and daily
at 2:00 AM. If a valid synchronization is detected, the time stamp for faults and
alarms is displayed on the AOP in real time.
DRIVE AOP
This operating status requires that the drive be connected to and synchronized by a
master clock. Every time the AOP is powered up, and daily at 2:00 AM, the time of
the drive is adopted as the time of the AOP. If a valid synchronization is detected,
the time stamp for faults and alarms is displayed on the AOP in real time.
Select Save and confirm the setting with OK.
Expanded settings
In this menu, you can make the following extended settings:
Load the AOP settings from the CU
Automatically acknowledge topology
Mixed operation of servo/vector
Database mode for the test bay
(UZHLWHUWH(LQVWHOOXQJHQ
$23(LQVWHOOXQJHQYRQ&XODGHQ
7RSRORJLHDXWRPDWLVFKTXLWWLHUHQ
0LVFKEHWULHEYRQ6(5929(&725
'DWHQEDQN0RGXVIU3UIIHOG
-D
-D
1HLQ
1HLQ
]XUFN
QGHUQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
169
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
2.
170
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
3.7.6.8
6RIWZDUH'DWHQEDQNYHUVLRQ
+DXSWPHQ
%DWWHULH]XVWDQG
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
$23
'LDJQRVH
,QEHWULHEQDKPH
6HUYLFH
7DVWDWXUWHVW
/('7HVW
)ODVK)6IRUPDWLHUHQ
3HUVLVWHQWH'DWHQEDQNOVFKHQ
Software/database version
6RI W ZDUH'DWHQEDQN YHUVLRQ
)DEU LNQXPPHU
7'
0/)% 1XPPHU
6/$ $ &$
)LU PZDUH
'DWXP =HLW
]XUFN
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
171
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
Battery status
Shows the charging state of the AOP battery. The battery ensures that the data in the
database and the current time are retained. A battery voltage of 2 V is equal to 0%, and a
voltage of 3 V is equal to 100%. The data is secure up to a battery voltage of 2 V.
If the battery voltage is 2.45 V, the message "Replace battery" is displayed.
If the battery voltage is 2.30 V, the following message: "Warning: weak battery" is
displayed.
If the battery voltage is 2 V, the message "Attention: The battery is dead" is displayed.
If the drive is not activated for a long period of time, the time and status of the database
might not be displayed because of insufficient battery voltage. In this case, messages
appear that prompt you to replace the battery, load the database and set the time.
Information on replacing the battery can be found in the operating instructions of the
converter in Chapter Maintenance and Servicing.
%DW WHU LH]XVWDQG
9
%DWWHULHVSDQQXQJ
]XUFN
Communication
In this menu, the status of the communication between AOP30 and CU are displayed. The
following items are displayed:
Number of fault-free message frames
Number of faulty message frames
Number of character frame faults
Number of overflow errors
Number of start limiter errors
Number of end limiter errors
Number of character length errors
Number of frame test mark errors
Number of frame test mark errors
Number of frame transfer errors
Number of layer 2 message frame failures
PPI status
Number of layer 7 message frame failures
Number of message frame repetitions (SD2)
172
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
.RPPXQLNDWLRQ
)HKOHUIUHLH7HOHJUDPPH
IHKOHUKDIWH7HOHJUDPPH
=HLFKHQ)UDPH)HKOHU
3DULWWVIHKOHU
EHUODXI)HKOHU
6WDUWEHJUHQ]HU)HKOHU
]XUFN
Keyboard test
In this menu, the function of each individual key of the AOP is tested. Keys that you press
are represented on a symbolic keyboard on the display. You can press the keys in any order
you wish. If each key has been pressed at least once, you can exit the menu by pressing the
Back key.
You can also exit the keyboard test menu by pressing and holding any key.
LED test
In this menu, the LEDs of the AOP can be function tested.
Flash FS formatting
The ACX files, which the drive reads for describing the parameters and alarms, are
temporarily saved in the flash file system (and then deleted after parsing)
To rule out the risk of files remaining behind, the Flash FS can be manually deleted via this
menu item.
NOTICE
The formatting of the flash memory begins without further prompting immediately after you
press OK.
Note
The CompactFlash card is not formatted.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
173
Start
Commissioning (software)
3.7 Commissioning via the operator panel
NOTICE
The database is deleted immediately, without further confirmation, after pressing OK.
3.7.6.9
Language
6SUDFKH
Selecting a language
Press the Menu key.
Using the function key , select the Language line and confirm with the OK key.
Using the function key , select the desired language.
German
English
French
Italian
Chinese
Confirm with the OK function key.
174
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.1
Overview
The table below provides an overview of the parameter macros and the signals
interconnected by the different macros. For a detailed description of the specific parameters
of a macro and the terminals and item codes assigned to these parameters, refer to the
section entitled "Parameters for Interconnecting Signals (Page 318) "
Table 4-1
Macro
Autostart macros
PM001501 on VECTORMV
Default interconnections
PM001540 on VECTORMV
Default interconnections
PM001540 on B_INFMV
Default interconnections
Optional macros
PM001555
PM001557
PM001558
PM001571
PM001580
PM001582
PM001584
PM001585
4.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
175
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Note
Observe that the following protection settings have already been specified via the product
designation (MLFB) and tested in the routine testing:
Current and voltage limits
Command "short-circuiter ON"
Command "TAS ON
4.3
4.3.1
Introduction
Various hardware tests are required to ensure the converter is working correctly.
The tests listed in the "Mandatory hardware tests" section check the safety-related
components and are compulsory.
The tests listed in the "Recommended hardware tests" section check the peripherals. It is
advisable to perform these tests, too.
176
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
4.3.2
4.3.2.1
Circuit-breaker test
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
No power may be supplied to the converter when operating the circuit breaker in test mode.
Failure to observe this warning may result in serious injury or death.
There are various ways of making sure the unit is isolated from the power supply:
Confirm that the circuit breaker is switched to the TEST position.
Confirm that the medium-voltage power supply is switched off.
Do not connect the cable from the switch to the converter.
Requirements
The external interconnection between the control signals and the check-back signals from
the circuit breaker to the controller must be installed.
Test mode
The test mode is activated using parameters p6650 and p6651.
Set parameter p6650 to "Test mode line breaker (1)" in the infeed.
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Control parameters
Parameters p6690 and r6672 to r6676 are available for use as control parameters.
Parameter p6690 shows the status of the check-back signal from the circuit breaker.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
177
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Figure 4-3
The opening and monitoring times are given by parameters r6672 to r6676.
Figure 4-4
Note
The interrupting time must not exceed 100 ms.
4.3.2.2
178
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Figure 4-5
Note
The two DC links must be precharged to the set value.
The DC links are regularly recharged to this value.
Check whether the two DC link halves are charging symmetrically.
Switching off the precharging and testing the fault initiating switch
The switch key can only be inserted if the value has dropped below 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal
after the waiting period has elapsed!
NOTICE
The switch key can no longer be inserted during precharging of the DC-link beyond a value
of 0.01 x Uzk_Nominal!
The make-proof grounding switch must never be actuated if the auxiliary power is switched
off!
The make-proof grounding switch can only be activated if the DC-link voltage has dropped
to below 1% of the nominal DC-link voltage and a waiting period of 125s/44s has elapsed.
Switch off the auxiliary power supply (1 AC 230 V). The switch key must not be
inserted.
Check the check-back signals of the make-proof grounding switch.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
179
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
4.3.2.3
Description
The doors are only unlocked if:
the grounding switch has been engaged and
the insulation monitoring has reported "ground connection."
Check the locking mechanism by actuating the door handles several times.
4.3.2.4
Description
There are two use cases for this test:
If there is no power being supplied to the circuit breaker, the level of the DC link voltage
at which the circuit breaker should cut in can be adjusted. This also activates the
undervoltage tripping level when the DC link voltage decays.
Testing the switching sequence for precharging and circuit breakers
180
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Figure 4-6
4.3.2.5
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
181
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
To activate the test mode, a binary input from a TM module must be wired to p6651 and an
H signal must be specified on the input. Setting p6651 to 1 is not sufficient.
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The main fans in the power unit are activated when the converter is switched on.
As soon as the fans have run up, the nominal differential pressure is reached.
If, after the switch-on monitoring time has elapsed, the differential pressure is not higher than
the set threshold value, an alarm or a fault shutdown will occur with the corresponding
message.
182
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.3 Conducting hardware tests
Set parameter p6650 to 4 (main fan test mode infeed) in the Infeed.
Interconnect the signal source for activating/deactivating test mode to parameter 6651
using a switch box.
After the time specified in p6794 has elapsed, the differential pressure (r6801) must
have been established and must be well above the warning threshold (r6790).
Switch off the motor protection switch of one fan.
The shutdown of the motor protection switch of one fan should lead to the fault
shutdown with the following error message:
"49110 fan monitoring: Differential pressure < interference
threshold"
Note
Test of the main fans for the sinusoidal filter option (Y15)
If you set the sinusoidal filter option, then also check the associated fans.
The activation takes place together with the other main fans.
4.3.3.2
Description
Note
This test is only required on air-cooled converters!
The redundant main fan is activated if one of the main fans for normal operation fails during
operation.
4.3.3.3
Description
The auxiliary fans are activated
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
183
Start
Commissioning (hardware)
4.4 Checking the signal wiring
by the temperature evaluation unit, if the temperature in the converter exceeds the set
value (T2).
From the software if the crowbar is triggered or the test mode of the auxiliary fans is
selected.
Note
The protection switch for the auxiliary fans must be switched on.
4.4
4.4.1
Potential concept
Description
A noise-free connection between the internal and external supply voltage can be achieved
by connecting the 0 V potentials to each other and grounding them. This also eliminates the
need for the control circuit insulation monitor required by DIN EN 60204-1.
3
1
3
0
0
,QWHUQDO
FRQVXPHUV
Figure 4-7
184
([WHUQDO
FRQVXPHUV
Potential concept
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Parameters
Parameter types
The following adjustable and display parameters are available:
Adjustable parameters (write/read)
These parameters have a direct impact on the behavior of a function.
Example: Ramp-up and ramp-down time of a ramp function generator
Display parameters (read only)
These parameters are used to display internal variables.
Example: Current motor current
3DUDPHWHU
UHDGU
%,&2RXWSXW
Figure 5-1
1RUPDO
UHDGRQO\SDUDPHWHUV
UHDGZULWHS
%,&2LQSXW
1RUPDO
UHDGZULWHSDUDPHWHUV
Parameter types
All these drive parameters can be read and changed via PROFIBUS using the mechanisms
defined in the PROFIdrive profile.
Parameter categories
The parameters of the individual drive objects are categorized into data sets as follows:
Data-set-independent parameters
These parameters exist only once per drive object.
Data-set-dependent parameters
These parameters can exist several times for each drive object and can be addressed via
the parameter index for reading and writing. A distinction is made between various types
of data set:
CDS: Command Data Set
By configuring several command data sets and switching between them, the drive can
be operated with different pre-configured signal sources.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
185
Start
&'6&RPPDQG'DWD6HW
''6'ULYH'DWD6HW
0RWRUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
(QFRGHUVHOHFWLRQ
('6(QFRGHU'DWD6HW
0'60RWRU'DWD6HW
Figure 5-2
Parameter categories
186
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Resetting parameters
The parameters can be reset to the factory setting as follows:
Reset parameters - current drive object
p0970 = 1; automatically reset to 0
Reset parameters - all parameters drive object "Control Unit"
p0009 = 30 parameter reset
p0976 = 1; automatically reset to 0
Access level
The parameters are subdivided into access levels. The List Manual specifies in which access
level the parameter is displayed and can be changed. The required access levels 0 to 4 can
be set in p0003.
Table 5-1
Access levels
Access level
Remark
0 User-defined
1 Standard
Parameters for the simplest operator functions (e.g. p1120 = ramp function
generator ramp-up time).
2 Extended
3 Expert
4 Service
Please contact your local Siemens office for the password for parameters
with access level 4 (Service). It must be entered into p3950.
Note
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
187
Start
5.2
5.2.1
Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.
Binectors
Name
Description
BI
Binector input
Binector input
BO
(signal sink)
Binector output
Binector output
(signal source)
188
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Connectors
Name
Description
CI
Connector input
Connector input
CO
(signal sink)
Connector output
Connector output
(signal source)
5.2.2
Description
To interconnect two signals, a BICO input parameter (signal sink) must be assigned to the
desired BICO output parameter (signal source).
The following information is required in order to connect a binector/connector input to a
binector/connector output:
Binectors: Parameter number, bit number, and drive object ID
Connectors without an index: Parameter number and drive object ID
Connectors with an index: Parameter number, index, and drive object ID
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW
&2&RQQHFWRURXWSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH
%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
&,&RQQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN
%2
U
%,
S[[[[\
&2ZLWKRXWLQGH[
U
&,
S[[[[\
&2ZLWKLQGH[
,QGH[ >@ U
>@ U
>@ U
>@ U
Figure 5-3
&,
S[[[[\
>@
Note
A signal source (BO) can be connected to any number of signal sinks (BI).
A signal sink (BI) can only be connected to one signal source (BO) at a time.
The BICO parameter interconnection can be implemented in different command data sets
(CDS). The different interconnections are activated by switching data sets.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
189
Start
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU
%LW
,QGH[QXPEHU
'HYLFHHJ&8
2ZQREMHFW
([DPSOHVRIVLJQDOVRXUFHV
Figure 5-4
ELQ
GH]
ELQ
GH]
ELQ
GH]
()&KH[!&2>@
ELQ
ELQ
ELQ
KH[!)HVWH
ELQ
ELQ
ELQ
KH[!)HVWH
Sample interconnections
Example 1: Interconnection of digital signals
Suppose you want to operate a drive via terminals DI 0 and DI 1 on the Control Unit using
jog 1 and jog 2.
%2%LQHFWRURXWSXW
6LJQDOVRXUFH
%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN
9
;
',
;
',
;
',
;
',
S&
U
S&
U
9
Figure 5-5
U
U
-RJ
-RJ
,QWHUQDO
S&
-RJ
,QWHUQDO
S&
-RJ
190
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
%,%LQHFWRULQSXW
6LJQDOVLQN
'ULYH
9
;
',
S&
U
S&
2))
2))
2))
'ULYH
S&
S&
Figure 5-6
5.2.3
2))
2))
2))
Copying drives
When a drive is copied, the interconnection is copied with it.
Binector-connector-converter
Several digital signals are converted to a 32-bit integer double word or to a 16-bit integer
word.
p2080[0...15] BI: PROFIdrive PZD send bit-wise
Connector-binector-converter
A 32-bit integer double word or a 16-bit integer word is converted to individual digital
signals.
p2099[0...1] CI: PROFIdrive PZD selection receive bit-wise
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
191
Start
5.3
Data sets
192
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
U
U
&'6VHOHFWHG
S
S
S
&'6HIIHFWLYH
W
6ZLWFKRYHUWLPH
U
U
W
Figure 5-7
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
193
Start
194
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
DDS
Motor
(p0186)
Encoder 1
(p0187)
Encoder 2
(p0188)
Encoder 3
(p0189)
DDS 0
MDS 0
EDS 0
EDS 1
EDS 2
DDS 1
MDS 0
EDS 0
EDS 3
DDS 2
MDS 0
EDS 0
EDS 4
EDS 5
DDS 3
MDS 1
EDS 6
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
195
Start
Note
In STARTER, you can copy the drive data sets (Drive -> Configuration -> "Drive data sets"
tab page).
You can select the displayed drive data set in the relevant STARTER screens.
196
Parameters
Description
p0120
p0130
p0139
p0140
p0170
p0180
p0186
p0187
p0188
p0189
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
5.4
Description
p0809
p0810
p0811
p0812
p0813
p0819[0...2]
p0820
p0821
p0822
p0823
p0824
Description
By changing over the units, parameters and process quantities for input and output can be
changed over to an appropriate system of units (US units or as per unit quantities (%)).
The following supplementary conditions apply when changing over units:
Parameters of the type plate of the drive converter or the motor rating plate can be
changed over between SI/US units; however, a per unit representation is not possible.
After changing over the units parameter, all parameters that are assigned to one of the
units group dependent on it, are all changed over to the new system of units.
A parameter is available to select technological units (p0595) to represent technological
quantities in the technology controller.
If the units are converted to per unit quantities and the reference quantity changed, the
percentage value entered in a parameter is not changed.
Example:
A fixed speed of 80% corresponds, for a reference speed of 1500 RPM, to a value of
1200 RPM.
If the reference speed is changed to 3000 RPM, then the value of 80% is kept and
now means 2400 RPM.
Restrictions
When a unit changeover occurs, rounding to the decimal places is carried out. This can
lead to the original value being changed by up to one decimal place.
If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also
adjusted to ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
197
Start
Groups of units
Every parameter that can be changed over is assigned to a units group, that, depending on
the group, can be changed over within certain limits.
This assignment and the unit groups can be read for each parameter in the parameter list in
the List Manual.
The unit groups can be individually switched using 4 parameters (p0100, p0349, p0505 and
p0595).
Function in STARTER
To call up the function for converting units in STARTER, choose Drive object ->
Configuration -> Units. The reference parameters can be found under Drive object ->
Configuration -> Reference parameters
198
Parameter
s
Description
p0010
p0100
p0349
p0505
p0595
p0596
p2000
p2001
p2002
p2003
r2004
p2005
p2007
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
5.5
Reference parameters/normalizations
Description
Reference values, corresponding to 100%, are required for the statement of units as
percentages. These reference values are entered in parameters p2000 to p2007. They are
computed during the calculation through p0340 = 1 or in STARTER during drive
configuration. After calculation in the drive, these parameters are automatically protected via
p0573 = 1 from boundary violation through a new calculation (p0340). This eliminates the
need to adjust the references values in a PROFIdrive controller whenever a new calculation
of the reference parameters via p0340 takes place.
3HUFHQW
!SK\VLFDOXQLW
[
5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOHV
SU
[
3K\VLFDOXQLW
\
[
[ [
[
!SHUFHQW
\
[
[
>@
5HIHUHQFHYDULDEOHV
SU
Figure 5-8
Note
If a referenced form is selected and the reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are changed
retrospectively, the referenced values of some of the control parameters are also adjusted to
ensure that the control behavior is unaffected.
Reference speed
Scaling parameter
100 % = p2000
Reference voltage
100 % = p2001
Reference current
100 % = p2002
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
199
Start
Scaling parameter
Reference torque
100 % = p2003
Reference power
100 % = r2004
Reference angle
100% = p2005
90
Reference acceleration
100% = p2007
0.01 1/s2
1/s2
Reference frequency
100% = p2000/60
Reference flux
Reference temperature
100% = 100C
100 % = 90
200
Parameter
Description
p0340
p0573
p2000
p2001
Reference voltage
p2002
Reference current
p2003
Reference torque
r2004
Reference power
p2005
Reference angle
p2007
Reference acceleration
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.1
6.1.1
Basic settings
Basic settings
0RWRU0RGXOH
&DEOH
)LOWHU
S
5 )LOWHU
S
/ )LOWHU
S
&
Figure 6-1
S>0@
5 &DEOH
S>0@
/ &DEOH
0RWRU
S>0@
S>0@
S>0@
/ 5
/ 6
56
S>0@
S>0@
55
)LOWHU
Equivalent circuit diagram, asynchronous motor with output filter and cable
Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.
The control expects you to enter the physical ECD data for a motor star connection. If the
values for a delta connection are the only data available, all parameters must be divided by a
factor of 3. This is relevant only if the data is entered physically.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
201
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Table 6-1
Description
p0300:
Motor type
p0304
p0305
p0307
p0310
p0311
p0335
Remarks
The number of pole pairs is calculated
automatically from P310 / P311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in
error message 7950 when
commissioning is completed. The
suspected incorrect parameter is
shown in the appendage. The error
could be due to:
P307 >= 17,321 * P304 * P305
No motor selected (P300=0)
Slip = 0 or too low (induction motor
only)
It is very important that the value
specified for the rated motor speed
P311 is right to assess the motor data.
Description
p0322
P0323
p0341
p0342
p0352
Cable resistance
p0353
Line inductance
202
Remarks
If P322 is entered, the maximum speed
in P1082 cannot physically exceed
P322. Likewise, the current limit in
p640 cannot exceed P323 if p323 > 0.
These parameters are primarily
designed to protect the motor.
Parameters P341 and P342 are
required for acceleration precontrol and
for encoderless operation. If these
parameters are left blank then
estimated values are derived from
P341 on the basis of the rating plate
data.
The line parameters P352 and P353
are particularly important if there are
long supply cables between the
converter and the motor. They are
usually insignificant in relation to the
motor parameters if the cables are
short, however.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Table 6-3
Description
p0350
p0354
p0356
p0358
p0360
Remarks
Correct entry of the ECD data has a
beneficial influence on the control
characteristics. In particular, the speed
and torque can be estimated far more
accurately during encoderless
operation. If the main inductance P360
is unknown, the rated motor
magnetizing current P320 can be
entered instead. This also allows for
better estimation of the parameters.
The resulting magnetizing current,
calculated on the basis of the data
entered, is displayed in R331.
Output filter
If the output filter or the motor reactor options are selected then the following parameters are
required, or the drive will use the default values if a Siemens filter is used by selecting
P230=10,000. Filters or reactors made by other manufacturers need to be entered manually.
Table 6-4
Output filter
Parameter
Description
P230
Filter type
P233
Motor reactor
P234
P236
P237
Remarks
If several power units are connected in
parallel, then parameters P233-P237
must simply be entered (for each power
unit). The capacitors, reactors and
resistors can be connected in series or
in parallel in the drive.
If you are using a sinus filter, the
maximum output frequency is restricted
to 66 Hz due to the motor's selfexcitation. P322 is therefore set to 60 x
66 Hz / pole pair by default.
Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Table 6-5
Operating modes
Parameter
Description
P1300 = 0
P1300 = 2
P1300 = 18
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Remarks
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are service and
commissioning modes and not
intended for use in normal operation.
This is due to the fact that large motors
tend to vibrate if operated purely under
controlled conditions. The dynamics
203
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
Parameter
Description
P1300 = 20
P1300 = 21
P1300 = 22
P1300 = 23
Remarks
are also very poor and there is a high
risk of stalling. Only modes 20 to 23
should therefore be used ordinarily.
6.1.2
Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed
Identification process
Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:
204
r1912
r1913:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.1 Instructions for commissioning induction motors (ASM)
r1915
Once the measurements have been completed successfully (P1900=0) and if the values
displayed are plausible, the results can be transferred to the ECD data (p0316, p0350
p0360). To do this, set P1910=1.
In addition to the motor data, the non-linearity of the converter is also measured. This
involves the linearization parameter P6926 being optimized so that the low-frequency
current harmonics (6th harmonic) are minimized. The non-linearity is particularly evident
at low speeds, where it results in unsteady running. A good value for p6926 also
improves the precision and quality of encoderless control.
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.
6.1.3
Advanced settings
6.1.3.1
Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
205
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
6.1.3.2
See also
Speed controller (Page 231)
6.2
6.2.1
Safety information
WARNING
Danger! High voltage
High voltages can cause death or serious injury if the safety rules are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
As soon as the motor starts to rotate, a high voltage is generated.
Safely disconnect the motor. If this is not possible, the motor must be locked by a holding
brake, for example.
206
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Note
If pulse inhibition of the converter occurs (fault or OFF2), synchronous motors can generate
high terminal voltages in the field weakening range, which could lead to overvoltage in the
DC link. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due
to overvoltage:
Restrict (p0643 = 0) maximum speed (p1082)
External voltage limiter or chopper or other measures appropriate to the application (e.g.
circuit breaker on the motor side).
CAUTION
Overvoltages can result in damage to the converter.
The converter's components are only designed for a specific voltage.
With p0643 = 1, it must be ensured that there is sufficiently high and suitable overvoltage
protection. If necessary, precautionary measures should be taken on the system side.
6.2.2
Basic settings
Basic settings
0RWRU0RGXOH
5HDFWRU
S
S
5 5HDFWRU / 5HDFWRU
Figure 6-2
&DEOH
S>0@
5 &DEOH
S>0@
/ &DEOH
0RWRU
S>0@
S>0@
56
/T
S>0@
/G
S>0@
N7
Equivalent Circuit Diagram, Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor with Output Reactor and Cable
Note
The parameters described in this section are configured interactively by the STARTER
wizard.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
207
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Description
p0300:
Motor type
p0304
p0305
p0307
p0310
p0311
p0335
Remarks
The number of pole pairs is calculated
automatically from P310 / P311. Any
discrepancies in the data are shown in
error message 7950 when
commissioning is completed. The
suspected incorrect parameter is
shown in the appendage. The error
could be due to:
P307 >= 17,321 * P304 * P305
No motor selected (P300=0)
Description
p0322
P0323
p0341
p0342
p0352
Cable resistance
p0353
Line inductance
Table 6-8
208
p0316
Remarks
Description
Motor torque constant
Remarks
Specifying the correct ECD data has a
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Parameters
Description
p0350
p0356
p0357
Remarks
positive effect on the closed-loop
control. In particular, stability and
torque precision are improved when
operating with no encoder.
Motor reactor
If the motor reactor option has been chosen, the following parameters must be entered. A
permanently-excited synchronous machine cannot be operated near a sinus filter.
Table 6-9
Motor reactor
Parameters
Description
P230
Filter type
P233
Motor reactor
P236
P237
Remarks
If several power units are connected in
parallel, then parameters P233-P237
must simply be entered (for each power
unit). The capacitors, reactors and
resistors can be connected in series or
in parallel in the drive.
Operating modes
The drive offers the following operating modes:
Table 6-10
Operating modes
Parameters
Description
P1300 = 0
P1300 = 2
P1300 = 18
P1300 = 20
P1300 = 21
P1300 = 22
P1300 = 23
Remarks
Modes 0, 2 and 18 are intended
primarily for commissioning purposes,
and are not really suitable for ordinary
operation. This is due to the fact that
large motors tend to vibrate if operated
purely under controlled conditions. The
dynamics are also very poor and there
is a high risk of stalling. Only modes 20
to 23 should therefore be used
ordinarily.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
209
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
6.2.3
Description
Following commissioning, motor identification can be carried out automatically. This
determines motor data more precisely by means of rotating measurement. No static
moments must be allowed to act on the drive (no load torque).
DANGER
A running motor may result in death, serious personal injury or severe material damage.
When identifying the motor data, motor movements are initiated, which can reach the
maximum motor speed.
The emergency STOP functions must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect
the machines and personnel, the relevant safety regulations must be observed
Identification process
Switch the identification on by setting p1900=1. Identification begins with the next ON
command.
The motor performs various test movements and the right-hand rotary field is accelerated
to its rated speed.
Once identification has been successfully completed, p1900 is automatically reset to 0.
Identification ends with an internal pulse block, and the motor coasts to a standstill.
The following data is identified:
r1912
r1937
Torque constant
r1988
r1989
Once the measurements have been completed successfully (P1900=0) and if the values
displayed are plausible, the results can be transferred to the ECD data (p0316, p0350
p0360). To do this, set P1910=1.
In addition to the motor data, the non-linearity of the converter is also measured. This
involves the linearization parameter P6926 being optimized so that the low-frequency
current harmonics (6th harmonic) are minimized. The non-linearity is particularly evident
at low speeds, where it results in unsteady running. A good value for p6926 also
improves the precision and quality of encoderless control.
Note
If autoidentification is not possible, manual optimization can be carried out instead. To
perform manual optimization the drive needs to be turned at a low frequency (approx. 1
Hz) while p6926 is adjusted from 0-200% so that the 6th harmonic in the current (r78) is
minimized.
210
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
6.2.4
Description
Pole position identification uses a test signal to determine the position of the rotor. The
following parameters determine the type and duration of the test signal.
p1980
p1993
Test current
p1994
Identification period
p1995
Identification frequency
Saturation-based procedure
If the motor has different inductance distribution in the d and q axis the procedures
p1980 = 4: for Ld > Lq
p1980 = 5: for Ld < Lq
can be selected. A possible data sheet or the identification results shown in the "Pole
position identification" section provide more information about the distribution. To provide
positive pole position identification, the difference between the d and the q inductance should
be at least 5%. The test current for this procedure is comparatively low (p1993 = approx.
10% of rated motor current).
If Ld and Lq are approximately equal, the p1980 = 1 procedure should be chosen. This
procedure requires high current levels (p1993 = approx. 50-100% of rated motor current)
and causes correspondingly high levels of noise and movement.
Note
The low- and high-level signal response of the inductances can be different. Procedures 4
and 5, for example, can produce perfectly acceptable results with a low test current, even
when Ld and Lq are more or less identical in terms of the high-level signal response. It is
therefore vital that the procedures are tested in advance.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
211
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Motion-based procedures
Procedure
p1980 = 10
does not need a encoder. It injects the test current entered in p1993 and performs an
electrical 360 movement within the time specified in p1994. The motor aligns itself and
follows the current phasor. The test current should be orientated towards the maximum
blocking torque so that blocked drives can also be aligned.
Procedure
p1980 = 11
requires a encoder. The motor oscillates slightly, and these movements are detected and
evaluated with the encoder signal.
Note
If the oscillations are not strong enough, because the encoder does not have the necessary
resolution, the amplitude of the test current must be increased (p1993) or the frequency
reduced (p1995). Although this procedure is extremely accurate, it is only of limited use in
the case of fully-braked drives. The amplitude of the test current may have to be set very
high.
Test mode
Test mode can be used to find the best procedure for a particular motor. If test mode is
active (P1983 = 1), a cyclic permanent identification using the selected procedure (P1980) is
carried out the next time a pulse is issued. The phase displacement (r1984) is cyclically
updated and should fluctuate by no more than +/- 30.
NOTICE
In test mode, the drive can move several pole pitches
The following parameters can be modified to improve reproducibility:
Test current p1993:
A high test current produces better results, especially with procedures1, 10 and 11. For
procedures 4 and 5, the current is not the decisive factor.
Identification period p1994:
A longer identification period will generally improve reproducibility for all procedures.
Procedure P1980 = 10 in particular requires an adequate amount of time to allow the
motor to align itself.
Identification frequency p1995:
As a rule, a higher frequency has a positive impact in procedures 1, 4 and 5. However,
the value cannot be increased indefinitely due to the limited switching frequency of the
converter.
If procedure 11 is selected, the test frequency may have to be reduced to ensure
sufficient movement can be sensed by the encoder.
212
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.2 Instructions for commissioning permanent-magnet synchronous motors
Operating modes
In situations where a encoder is not being used, the pole position is identified each time a
pulse is issued, as the positional information is usually lost when the pulse is blocked.
If a encoder is being used, the response can be selected using P1982:
p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined
before a pulse is issued for the first time following encoder errors
before a pulse is issued for the first time after switching to a new operating mode
(p1300).
p1982 = 2: The pole position is determined each time before a pulse is issued.
p1982 = 1: The pole position is only determined:
Following every complete or partial CU module boot
6.2.5
Advanced settings
6.2.5.1
Description
The flux controller determines the start of field weakening. The starting point can be changed
via P6701. If the motor voltage reaches the value set in P6701 then field suppression is
activated.
The default setting is P6701 = 100% of the rated motor voltage. If the motor is also designed
for higher voltages then P6701 can also be increased. If the converter reaches the
modulation depth limit before this voltage is reached then field weakening is activated
sooner. In this case the controller stays at the modulation depth limit and has no spare
capacity.
The modulation depth limit can be adjusted using the parameter P1803. The maximum
modulation range possible is determined by the UF table, however. The controller therefore
uses the minimum from P1803 and takes the maximum from the internal UF table.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
213
Start
Functions
6.3 Note regarding the commissioning of separately excited synchronous motors
6.2.5.2
See also
Speed controller (Page 231)
6.3
6.4
Drive Functions
6.4.1
Setpoint channel
6.4.1.1
Description
In the extended setpoint channel, setpoints from the setpoint source are conditioned for
motor control.
214
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
The setpoint for motor control can also originate from the technology controller (see
"Technology controller").
6HWSRLQWVRXUFHV
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
$QDORJ
LQSXWV
)L[HG
VSHHGVHWSRLQWV
)LHOGEXV
-RJ
6XSSOHPHQWDU\
VHWSRLQW
0DLQVHWSRLQW
0DLQVXSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
GLUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
6HUYRYHFWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Figure 6-3
Setpoint sources
The closed-loop control setpoint can be interconnected from various sources using BICO
technology (e.g. to p1070 CI: main setpoint (see function diagram 3030)).
There are various options for setpoint input:
Fixed speed setpoints
Motorized potentiometer
Jog
Field bus
Setpoint via PROFIBUS, for example
Via the analog inputs of the following exemplary components:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
215
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
e.g. Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
e.g. Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
e.g. Terminal Module 41 (TM41)
6.4.1.2
Jog
Description
This function can be selected via digital inputs or via a field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS). The
setpoint is, therefore, predefined via p1058[D] and p1059[D].
When a jog signal is present, the motor is accelerated to the jog setpoint with the
acceleration ramp of the ramp function generator (referred to the maximum speed p1082;
see diagram "Function chart: jog 1 and jog 2"). After the jog signal has been deselected, the
motor is decelerated via the set ramp of the ramp function generator.
CAUTION
The jog function is not PROFIdrive compatible!
6LJQDO
-RJ
6LJQDO
212))
(IIHFWLYH
WRWDOVHWSRLQWU
-RJVHWSRLQW
(IIHFWLYH
Figure 6-4
216
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
-RJ
S
'LJLWDOLQSXW
W
)LHOGEXV
-RJ
S
W
Q
S
S
Figure 6-5
S
S
S
S
S
S
W
Jog properties
If both jog signals are issued at the same time, the current speed is maintained (constant
velocity phase).
Jog setpoints are approached and exited via the ramp function generator.
The jog function can be activated from the "ready to start" status and from the OFF1
deceleration ramp.
If ON/OFF1 = "1" and jog are selected simultaneously, ON/OFF1 has priority.
OFF2 and OFF3 have priority over jogging.
In jog mode, the main speed setpoints (r1078) and the supplementary setpoints 1 and 2
(p1155 and p1160) are inhibited.
The suppression bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094) and the minimum limit (p1080) in the
setpoint channel are also active in jog mode.
In jog mode, ZSWA.02 (operation enabled) is set to "0" because the speed setpoint has
not been enabled for control.
The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
217
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Jog sequence
32:(521
63RZHURQGLVDEOH
=6:$(
=6:$(
!
&RPPLVVLRQLQJILQLVKHG
S DQGS
$8667:$(
$8667:$(
[
!
!
9RQ(3WHUPLQDOV
SRZHUXQLW
65HDG\WRSRZHUXS
!
=6:$
=6:$
!
'ULYHDWVWDQGVWLOO
0DLQFRQWDFWRURII
:DLWIRUMRJ
-RJ
67:$!
+:SXOVHHQDEOH
>)3@
-RJ
67:$!
6F-RJ
GHFHOHUDWLRQUDPS
65HDG\WRUXQ
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$
=6:$
! =6:$
=6:$
!
5XQGRZQGULYHXVLQJUDPS
IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRUXQWLO
_Q_QBPLQSVSHHG
WKUHVKROGVWDQGVWLOO
PRQLWRULQJ
!
/LQHFRQWDFWRU2Q
:DLWIRUSUHFKDUJH
!
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$
5HDG\IURP0RWRU0RGXOHU
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQFRPSOHWH
U
,QIHHGUHDG\
S
-RJ
-RJ
-RJ
-RJ
62SHUDWLRQ
!
=6:$
=6:$
=6:$
!
SXOVHVHQDEOHG
FRQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
HQDEOHDVVRFLDWHGMRJVHWSRLQW
Figure 6-6
Jog sequence
Jog control
Signal name
Binector input
PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116
0 = OFF1
STWA.0
p0840 ON/OFF1
STW1.0
218
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Signal name
Binector input
PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116
0 = OFF2
STWA.1
p0844 1. OFF2
p0845 2. OFF2
STW1.1
0 = OFF3
STWA.2
p0848 1. OFF3
p0849 2. OFF3
STW1.2
Enable operation
STWA.3
STW1.3
Jog 1
STWA.8
STW1.8
Jog 2
STWA.9
STW1.9
Table 6-12
Signal name
Parameters
PROFIdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 116
Ready to power up
ZSWA.0
r0899.0
ZSW1.0
Ready to run
ZSWA.1
r0899.1
ZSW1.1
Operation enabled
ZSWA.2
r0899.2
ZSW1.2
Power-on disable
ZSWA.6
r0899.6
ZSW1.6
Pulses enabled
ZSWA.11
r0899.11
ZSW1.11
Parameters
Description
p1055[CDS]
p1056[CDS]
p1058[DDS]
p1059[DDS]
p1082[DDS]
Maximum speed
p1120[DDS]
p1121[DDS]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
219
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.1.3
Description
This function can be used to specify preset speed setpoints. The fixed setpoints are defined
in parameters and selected via binector inputs. Both the individual fixed setpoints and the
effective fixed setpoint are available for further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. to
connector input p1070 - CI: main setpoint).
Properties
Number of fixed setpoints: Fixed setpoint 1 to 15
Selection of fixed setpoints: Binector input bits 0 to 3
Binector input bits 0, 1, 2 and 3 = 0 -> setpoint = 0 active
Unused binector inputs have the same effect as a "0" signal
Parameters
Description
Adjustable parameters
p1001[D] ... p1015[D]
p1020[C]
p1021[C]
p1022[C]
p1023[C]
Display parameters
r1024
r1197
220
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.1.4
Motorized potentiometer
Description
This function is used to simulate an electromechanical potentiometer for setpoint input.
You can switch between manual and automatic mode for setpoint input. The specified
setpoint is routed to an internal ramp function generator. Setting values, start values and
braking with OFF1 do not require the ramp function generator of the motorized
potentiometer.
The output of the ramp function generator for the motorized potentiometer is available for
further interconnection via a connector output (e.g. interconnection to connector input p1070
- CI: main setpoint, an additional ramp function generator is then active).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
221
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
p1030[DDS]
p1035[CDS]
p1036[CDS]
p1037[DDS]
p1038[DDS]
p1039[CDS]
p1040[DDS]
p1041[CDS]
p1042[CDS]
p1043[CDS]
p1044[CDS]
r1045
CO: Motorized potentiometer, speed setpoint in front of the ramp function generator
p1047[DDS]
p1048[DDS]
r1050 CO:
p1082[DDS]
Maximum speed
6.4.1.5
Description
The supplementary setpoint can be used to incorporate correction values from lower-level
controllers. This can be easily carried out using the addition point for the
main/supplementary setpoint in the setpoint channel. Both variables are imported
simultaneously via two separate or one setpoint source and added in the setpoint channel.
222
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0DLQVHWSRLQW
VFDOLQJ
S>&@
0DLQVHWSRLQW
U
S>&@
6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
U
S>&@
U
6XSSOHPHQWDU\
VHWSRLQWVFDOLQJ
S>&@
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQOLPLWLQJ
'LUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQUHYHUVDO
6XSSUHVVLRQEDQGZLGWKV
6HWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQ
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Figure 6-7
Adjustable parameters
p1020[C]
p1071[C] CI:
p1075[C]
p1076[C]
Display parameters
r1073[C]
r1077[C]
r1078[C]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
223
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.1.6
Description
A reverse operation involves a direction reversal. A direction reversal in the setpoint channel
can be triggered by selecting direction reversal p1113[CDS].
If, on the other hand, a negative or positive setpoint is not to be preselected via the setpoint
channel, this can be prevented via parameter p1110[CDS or p1111[CDS]. However, the
following settings for minimum speed (p1080) in the setpoint channel are still operative. With
the minimum speed, the motor can turn in a negative direction, although p1110 = 1 is set.
'HDFWLYDWHSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
'HDFWLYDWHQHJDWLYHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
S>&@
'LUHFWLRQUHYHUVDO
S>&@
6NLSIUHTXHQF\EDQGV
VHWSRLQWOLPLWDWLRQV
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Figure 6-8
224
Parameters
Description
p1110[CDS]
p1111[CDS]
p1113[CDS
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.1.7
Description
In the range 0 U/min to setpoint speed, a drive train (e.g. motor, coupling, shaft, machine)
can have one or more points of resonance, which can result in vibrations. The suppression
bandwidths can be used to prevent operation in the resonance frequency range.
The limit frequencies can be set via p1080[DDS] and p1082[DDS]. These limits can be
changed during operation with the connectors p1085[CDS] and p1088[CDS].
S>'@
S>'@
6XSSUHVVLRQ
EDQGZLGWKV
S>'@
S>'@
S
S>&@
0LQ
U
S>'@
0LQVSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ
S>'@
0D[VSHHGOLPLWDWLRQ
\
\
[
\
[
U
[ \
U
S'@
S
S>&@
0D[
U
5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
0RWRUFRQWURO
Figure 6-9
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
225
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
Setpoint limitation
p1080[D]
Minimum speed
p1082[D]
Maximum speed
p1083[D]
r1084
p1085[C]
p1086[D]
r1087
p1088[C] DI:
r1119
Suppression bandwidths
p1091[D] ... p1094[D]
p1101[D]
6.4.1.8
Description
The ramp function generator is used to limit acceleration in the event of abrupt setpoint
changes, which helps prevent load surges throughout the drive train. The ramp-up time
p1120[DDS] and ramp-down time p1121[DDS] can be used to set an acceleration ramp and
a deceleration ramp independently of each other. This allows a controlled transition to be
made in the event of setpoint changes.
The maximum speed p1082[DDS] is used as a reference value for calculating the ramps
from the ramp-up and ramp-down times. A special adjustable ramp can be set via p1135 for
fast stop (OFF3), e.g. for rapid controlled deceleration when an emergency stop button is
pressed.
There are two types of ramp function generator:
Simple ramp function generator with
Acceleration and deceleration ramps
Ramp for fast stop (OFF3)
Tracking can be selected via a binector input
226
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Setting values for the ramp function generator
Extended ramp function generator also has
Initial and final rounding off
Note
The ramp function generator cannot be frozen (via p1141) in jog mode (r0046.31 = 1).
7XS
7GQ
S
W
S
\
S
W
S
7XS
Figure 6-10
7GQ
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
227
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
\
S
7GQ
[
\
S
G\GW ,5
)5
,5
)5 ,5
)5
,5
)5
W
7XSBHII
Figure 6-11
7GQBHII
228
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
ZLWKWUDFNLQJ
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
2XWSXWRI
UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
2XWSXWRI
UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
S
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
W
Figure 6-12
W
W W
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
229
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Control signal STW1.4 Enable ramp function generator
Control signal STW1.5 Start/stop ramp function generator
Control signal STW1.6 Enable setpoint
Control signal STW2.1 Bypass ramp function generator
Adjustable parameters
p1115
p1120[DDS]
p1121[DDS]
p1122[CDS]
p1130[DDS]
p1131[DDS]
p1134[DDS]
p1135[DDS]
p1136[DDS]
p1137[DDS]
p1140[CDS]
p1141[CDS]
p1143[CDS]
p1144[CDS]
p1145[DDS]
p1148 [DDS]
p1151 [DDS]
Display parameters
230
r1119
p1149
r1150
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.2
Speed controller
6.4.2.1
Description
Both closed-loop control procedures with and without a sensor (VC, SLVC) have the same
speed controller structure, which contains the following components:
PI controller
Speed controller pre-control
Droop function
The total of the output variables result in the torque setpoint, which is reduced to the
permissible magnitude by means of the torque setpoint limitation.
Speed controller
The speed controller receives its setpoint (r0062) from the setpoint channel and its actual
value (r0063) either directly from the speed sensor (control with sensor (VC)) or indirectly via
the motor model (control without sensor (SLVC)). The system deviation is increased by the
PI controller and, in conjunction with the pre-control, results in the torque setpoint.
When the load torque increases, the speed setpoint is reduced proportionately when droop
is active, which means that the single drive within a group (two or more mechanically
connected motors) is relieved when the torque becomes too great.
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
U
U
3UH
FRQWURO
.S
6SHHG
FRQWURO
U
U
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
U
7Q
3,
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
U>@
U
U
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
7L
U>@
U
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROKDVEHHQDFWLYDWHG
S!
Figure 6-13
6/9&
7L
S
.S
S
7Q
S
9&
S
S
S
Speed controller
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
231
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
The following relationships apply for optimization:
If Kp is increased, the controller becomes faster, although overshoot is reduced. Signal
ripples and vibrations in the speed control loop, however, increase.
If Tn is decreased, the controller still becomes faster, although overshoot is increased.
When speed control is set manually, it is easiest to define the possible dynamic response via
Kp (and actual speed value smoothing) first before reducing the integral time as much as
possible. When doing so, closed-loop control must also remain stable in the field-weakening
range.
To suppress any vibrations that occur in the speed controller, it is usually only necessary to
increase the smoothing time in p1452 for operation with a sensor or p1442 for operation
without a sensor or reduce the controller gain.
The integral output of the speed controller can be monitored via r1482 and the limited
controller output via r1508 (torque setpoint).
Note
In comparison with speed control with a sensor, the dynamic response of drives without a
sensor is significantly reduced. The actual speed is derived by means of a model calculation
from the converter output variables for current and voltage that have a corresponding
interference level. To this end, the actual speed must be adjusted by means of filter
algorithms in the software.
232
Parameter
Description
p0340[0...n]
p1442[0...n]
p1452[0...n]
p1460[0...n]
p1462[0...n]
p1470[0...n]
p1472[0...n]
p1960
r0062
r0063[0...1]
r0345[0...n]
r1482
r1508 CO
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.2.2
Description
Two adaptation methods are available, namely free Kp_n adaptation and speed-dependent
Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation.
Free Kp_n adaptation can also also be activated in "operation without sensor" mode and is
used in "operation with sensor" mode as an additional factor for speed-dependent Kp_n
adaptation.
The speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n-adaptation is only active during "operation with sensor".
S
S
$GDSWDWLRQVLJQDO
S
[
UHIHUUHGWR
S[RUS[
$GDSWDWLRQVLJQDO
S
S
S
S
S
S
.SBQBDGDSW
6SHHGGHSHQGHQW
S
.SBQDGDSWDWLRQ
S
S
6HQVRUOHVV
YHFWRU
FRQWURO
DFWLYH
S
'\QDPLFUHGXFWLRQ
)LHOGZHDNHQLQJ
S
RQO\LQWKHFDVHRI
WR
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
VHQVRUOHVV
S
YHFWRUFRQWURO
S
S
S
6SHHGGHSHQGHQW
7QBQDGDSWDWLRQ
Figure 6-14
7QBQBDGDSW
Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
Dynamic response reduction in the field-weakening range can be activated (p1400.0) with
sensorless operation. This is activated when the speed controller is optimized in order to
achieve a greater dynamic response in the basic speed range.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
233
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
.SBQ
7QBQ
3URSRUWLRQDOJDLQ
,QWHJUDODFWLRQWLPH
S[S
S
.SBQ
ZLWKDGDSWDWLRQ
S[S
S
7QBQ
ZLWKRXWDGDSWDWLRQ
Q
S
S
&RQVWDQWORZHUVSHHGUDQJH
QS
$GDSWDWLRQUDQJH
SQS
&RQVWDQWXSSHUVSHHGUDQJH
Q!S
Figure 6-15
Parameterization
In the STARTER commissioning tool, the "Speed controller" parameter screen is selected
with the
icon in the toolbar:
Parameter
s
Description
p1400.5
p1470
p1472
234
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter
s
Description
p1456
p1457
p1458
p1459
p1466
p1461
p1462
p1463
p1464
p1465
6.4.2.3
S-
PY
GQ
GQ
SSS
GW
GW
The torque setpoint is switched/pre-controlled directly to the current controller via adaptors
as supplementary command variables (enabled via p1496).
The motor moment of inertia p0341 is calculated directly during commissioning or when the
entire set of parameters is calculated (p0340 = 1). The factor p0342 between the total
moment of inertia J and the motor moment of inertia must be determined manually or by
means of speed controller optimization. The acceleration is calculated from the speed
difference over the time dn/dt.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
235
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
$FFHOHUDWLRQSUHFRQWURO
S
S
S S
U
U
.S
S
S S
U
!
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
3,
6SHHG U>@
FRQWUROOHU
7L
U>@
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS
RQO\HIIHFWLYHLIS
Figure 6-16
7Q
7L
U
U
U
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
7L
.S
7Q
6/9&
S
S
S
9&
S
S
S
If the speed controller has been correctly adjusted, it only has to compensate for disturbance
variables in its own control loop, which can be achieved by means of a relatively small
change to the correcting variables. Speed setpoint changes, on the other hand, are carried
out without involving the speed controller and are, therefore, performed more quickly.
The effect of the pre-control variable can be adapted according to the application via the
evaluation factor p1496. If p1496 = 100 %, pre-control is calculated in accordance with the
motor and load moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). A balancing filter is used automatically to
prevent the speed controller from acting against the injected torque setpoint. The time
constant of the balancing filter corresponds to the equivalent delay time of the speed control
loop. Speed controller pre-control is correctly set (p1496 = 100%, calibration via p0342)
when the I component of the speed controller (r1482) does not change during a ramp-up or
ramp-down in the range n > 20% x p0310. Thus, the pre-control allows a new speed setpoint
to be approached without overshoot (prerequisite: the torque limiting does not act and the
moment of inertia remains constant).
If the speed controller is pre-controlled through injection, the speed setpoint (r0062) is
delayed with the same smoothing time (p1442 or p1452) as the actual value (r1445). This
ensures that no target/actual difference (r0064) occurs at the controller input during
acceleration, which would be attributable solely to the signal propagation time.
When speed pre-control is activated, the speed setpoint must be specified continuously or
without a higher interference level (avoids sudden torque changes). An appropriate signal
can be generated by smoothing the speed setpoint or activating the ramp function generator
rounding p1130 p1131.
The starting time r0345 (Tstart) is a measure for the total moment of inertia J of the machine
and describes the time during which the unloaded drive can be accelerated with the rated
motor torque r0333 (Mmot,rated) from standstill to the rated motor speed p0311 (nmot,rated).
U
7$QODXI -
Q0RWQHQQ
00RWQHQQ
S S
S
U
If these basic conditions are in line with the application, the starting time can be used as the
lowest value for the ramp-up or ramp-down time.
236
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Note
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120; p1121) of the ramp function generator in the
setpoint channel should be set accordingly so that the motor speed can track the setpoint
during acceleration and braking. This ensures that speed controller pre-control is functioning
optimally.
The acceleration pre-control using a connector input (p1495) is activated by the parameter
settings p1400.2 = 1 and p1400.3 = 0. p1428 (dead time) and p1429 (time constant) can be
set for balancing purposes.
Reference model
'URRS
FRPSHQVDWLRQ
5HIHUHQFHPRGHOVSHHGFRQWURO
S
S
U
S
.S
7Q
U
U
S
U>@
U
U>@
7L
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
7L
U
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
6SHHG
VHWSRLQW
Figure 6-17
3,
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
U
.S
7Q
6/9&
S
S
S
9&
S
S
S
Reference model
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
237
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
p0311[0...n]
r0333[0...n]
p0341[0...n]
p0342[0...n]
r0345[0...n]
p1400.2[0...n]
p1428[0...n]
p1429[0...n]
p1496[0...n]
r1518
6.4.2.4
p1400.3[0...n]
p1433[0...n]
p1434[0...n]
p1435[0...n]
r1436
p1437[0...n]
Droop function
Description
Droop (enabled via p1492) ensures that the speed setpoint is reduced proportionally as the
load torque increases.
238
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
S
'URRSFRPSHQVDWLRQ
S
U
PV
U
U
S
3UH
FRQWURO
U
7Q
.S
3,
6SHHG
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
U
U>@
U
U>@
U
U
FRQWUROOHU
7L
7RUTXH
VHWSRLQW
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
RQO\DFWLYHLISUHFRQWUROKDVEHHQDFWLYDWHGS!
RQO\DFWLYHZLWK6/9&
Figure 6-18
7L
.S
7Q
6/9&
S
S
S
9&
S
S
S
The droop function has a torque limiting effect on a drive that is mechanically coupled to a
different speed (e.g. guide roller on a goods train). In this way, a very effective load
distribution can also be realized in connection with the torque setpoint of a leading speedcontrolled drive. In contrast to torque control or load distribution with overriding and
limitation, with the appropriate setting, such a load distribution controls even a smooth
mechanical connection or the case of slipping.
This method is only suitable to a limited extent for drives that are accelerated and braked
with significant changes in speed.
The droop feedback is used, for example, in applications in which two or more motors are
connected mechanically or operate with a common shaft and fulfill the above requirements. It
limits the torque differences that can occur as a result of the mechanical connection between
the motors by modifying the speeds of the individual motors (drive is relieved when the
torque becomes too great).
Prerequisites
All connected drives must be operated with vector control and speed control (with or
without a sensor).
Only a single common ramp function generator may be used for mechanically coupled
drives.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
239
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.2.5
Parameters
Description
p1488[0...n]
p1489[0...n]
p1492[0...n]
r1482
r1490
Torque control
Description
With sensorless speed control SLVC (p1300 = 20) or speed control with sensor VC (p1300 =
21), a switchover can be made to torque control (slave drive) via BICO parameter p1501. A
switchover cannot be made between speed and torque control if torque control is selected
directly with p1300 = 22 or 23. The torque setpoint and/or supplementary setpoint can be
entered using BICO parameter p1503 (CI: torque setpoint) or p1511 (CI: supplementary
torque setpoint). The supplementary torque is active both with torque and speed control.
This particular feature with the supplementary torque setpoint allows a pre-control torque to
be applied for speed control.
Note
For safety reasons, connecting to fixed torque setpoints is currently not possible.
Regenerative energy may accumulate, and this must be either fed back into the supply
system or converted into heat using a braking resistor.
240
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Kp
Speed setpoint
Tn
3,
VSHHG
FRQWUROOHU
Ti
r1547[0]
r1538
r0079
Torque setpoint
r1547[1]
r1539
p1501
1=M_reg active
[FP2520.7] r1406.12
M_Zusatz 1
r1407.2
r1515
p1511[C]
(0)
M_Zusatz 1 Scal
p1512[C]
(0)
M_Zusatz 2 Scal
-2 000%...2 000%
p1514 [D] (100.0%)
M_Zusatz 2
p1513[C]
(0)
Figure 6-19
The total of the two torque setpoints is limited in the same way as the speed control torque
setpoint. Above the maximum speed (p1082), a speed limiting controller reduces the torque
limits in order to prevent the drive from accelerating any further.
True torque control (with self-adjusting speed) is only possible in closed-loop but not openloop control for sensorless vector control (SLVC). In open-loop control, the torque setpoint
adjusts the setpoint speed via a ramp function generator (integration time ~ p1499 x p0341 x
p0342). For this reason, sensorless torque control at standstill is only suitable for
applications that require an accelerating torque but no load torque (e.g. traction drives). This
restriction does not apply to torque control with sensor.
OFF responses
OFF1 and p1300 = 22, 23
Reaction as for OFF2
OFF2
Immediate pulse suppression, the drive coasts to standstill.
Power-on disable is activated.
OFF3
Switch to speed-controlled operation
n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp
(p1135).
The pulses are deleted at the end of the deceleration ramp or after a certain time (X x
ramp down time) has elapsed. Standstill is detected when the actual speed value is
less than the speed threshold (p1226) or when the monitoring time (p1227) that
started when speed setpoint speed threshold (p1226) has expired.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
241
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Power-on disable is activated.
6.4.2.6
Parameters
Description
p0341
p0342
p1300
p1499
p1501
p1503
p1511
p1512
p1513
p1514
r1515
Torque limiting
Description
S
S
7RUTXH
OLPLWV
U
U
0LQ
U
U
S
S
S
Figure 6-20
&XUUHQWOLPLW
0D[
U
U
3RZHU
OLPLWV
Torque limiting
The value specifies the maximum permissible torque whereby different limits can be
configured for motor and regenerative mode.
242
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
p0640[0...n]
Current limit
p1520[0...n]
p1521[0...n]
p1522[0...n]
p1523[0...n]
p1524[0...n]
p1525[0...n]
p1530[0...n]
p1531[0...n]
The currently active torque limit values are displayed in the following parameters:
Parameters
Description
r0067
r1526
r1527
The following limits all apply to the torque setpoint, which is present either at the speed
controller output in the case of speed control, or at the torque input in the case of torque
control. The minimum/maximum value of the different limits is used in each case.
The minimum value is calculated cyclically and displayed in parameters r1538 and r1539.
Parameters
Description
r1538
r1539
These cyclical values therefore limit the torque setpoint at the speed controller output/torque
input or indicate the instantaneous max. possible torque. If the torque setpoint is limited in
the motor module, this is indicated via the following diagnostic parameters:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
243
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
r1407.8
r1407.9
6.4.2.7
Description
The two current setpoint filters connected in series can be configured as follows:
Low-pass 2nd order (PT2): -40 dB/decade)
General 2nd-order filter
STARTER converts band-stop and low-pass with reduction in the parameters of the
general 2nd order filter.
Bandstop
Low-pass with reduction by a constant value
The phase frequency curve is shown alongside the amplitude log frequency curve. A
phase shift results in a control system delay and should be kept to a minimum.
Table 6-29
244
Parameter
s
Function
p1655
...
p1666
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.2.8
Current controller
Description
The default setting for the current controller is automatically derived from the motor data and
is usually adequate for most applications.
Ensure that the current controller is only optimized if:
the rating plate data are not completely known or autoidentification has not taken place
correctly. This means that no accurate motor data are available.
the motor has shut down due to overcurrent or current fluctuations.
the speed fluctuates (if the current controller is too slow, for example).
the dynamics of the current/speed controller do not appear adequate for the process.
In this case, select operating mode l/f (p1300 = 18) to optimize the following current
controller parameters with the aid of step responses:
p1715 Current controller gain
p1717 Current controller integral-time
For this purpose, record parameters r0075 and r0076 with the trace. The current setpoint
can be specified as a percentage of the rated motor current using p6890.
Note
If major adjustment of the current controller is unexpectedly necessary, this indicates that the
motor data was wrong or that there is severe non-linearity of the inductance (saturation). If
this is the case it is essential to check the motor and series reactor data.
If there is strong saturation then the current controller must not be set too rigidly. The
controller needs to be optimized to the inductance at the working point.
If the d/q axis of the motor is asymmetric (only for PEM) the current controller setting should
adjust to the axis with the lower inductance. Otherwise the other axis may become unstable.
If the converter has a sine-wave output filter then poorly dampened harmonic oscillations or
even shutdowns due to overcurrent may result. In this case, reduce the gain.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
245
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.3
Vdc control
Description
9GFBUHJ7Q
S
9GFBPD[
9GFBUHJ.S
S
9GFBUHJFRQILJ
S
9GFBPD[(LQBSHJ
U
9GFBUHJWBUDWHBDFWLRQ
S
9GFBDFW
U
&RQWURO=6:
U
U
9GFBUHJBRXWSXW
9GFBPD[G\QBIDFWRU
S
U
,TBVHW
/LPLWDWLRQ
9GFBUHJ7Q
S
9GFBUHJWB
UDWHBDFWLRQ
9GFBUHJ.S
S
S
9GFBUHJFRQILJ
S
9GFBPLQ(LQBSHJ
U
9GFBDFW
U
&RQWURO=6:
U
U
9GFBPLQ
9GFBPLQG\QBIDFWRU
S
Figure 6-21
The "Vdc control" function can be activated using the appropriate measures if an overvoltage
or undervoltage is present in the DC link.
Overvoltage in the DC link
Typical cause
The drive is operating in regenerative mode and is supplying too much energy to the
DC link.
Remedy
Reduce the regenerative torque to maintain the DC link voltage within permissible
limits. With the Vdc controller activated, the converter may automatically extend the
ramp down time of a drive if the shutdown supplies too much energy to the DC link.
Undervoltage in the DC link
Typical cause
Failure of the supply voltage or supply for the DC link.
246
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Remedy
Specify a regenerative torque for the rotating drive to compensate the existing losses,
thereby stabilizing the voltage in the DC link (kinetic buffering).
Properties
Vdc control
This comprises Vdc_max control and Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering), which are
independent of each other.
Joint PI controller. The dynamic factor is used to set Vdc_min and Vdc_max control
independently of each other.
Vdc_max control
This function can be used to control momentary regenerative load without shutdown
using overvoltage in the DC link.
Vdc_max control is only recommended with a supply without active closed-loop control
for the DC link and without feedback.
Vdc_min control (kinetic buffering)
With this function, the kinetic energy of the motor is used for buffering the DC link
voltage in the event of a momentary power failure, thereby delaying the drive.
3RZHUIDLOXUH
U
ZLWKRXW.,3IDXOW)
9
W
9GFFRQWUROOHU
DFWLYH
W
QVHW
ZLWKRXWSRZHUUHVWRUHIDXOW)
USP
7SRZHUBIDLO
W
W
,TVHW
$
PRWRUL]HG
UHJHQHUDWLYH
Figure 6-22
In the event of a power failure, Vdc_min control is activated when the Vdc_min switch-in level
is undershot. This controls the DC link voltage and maintains it at a constant level. The motor
speed is reduced.
When the power supply is restored, the DC link voltage increases again and Vdc_min control
is deactivated at 5 % above the Vdc_min switch-on level. The motor continues operating
normally.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
247
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
If the power supply is not reestablished, the motor speed continues to drop. When the
threshold in p1257 is reached, this results in a response in accordance with p1256.
Once the time threshold (p1255) has elapsed without the line voltage being reestablished, a
fault is triggered (F07406), which can be parameterized as required (factory setting: OFF3).
The Vdc_min controller can be activated for a drive. Other drives can participate in
supporting the DC link, by transferring a scaling of their speed setpoint from the controlling
drive via BICO interconnection.
Note
Ensure that the converter is not disconnected from the line supply. It could become
disconnected if, for example, a circuit breaker drops out.
9GFFRQWUROOHUDFWLYH
W
W
_Q_
QDFW
QVHW
W
,TVHW
$
,TVHW 7RUTXHJHQHUDWLQJFXUUHQWVHWSRLQW
Figure 6-23
248
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.4
Parameter
Description
p1240[0...n]
p1241[0...n]
r1242
p1243[0...n]
p1245[0...n]
r1246
p1247[0...n]
p1249[0...n]
p1250[0...n]
p1251[0...n]
p1252[0...n]
p1255[0...n]
p1256[0...n]
p1257[0...n]
r1258
Flying restart
Description
The ability to add a machine on the fly is controlled using parameter P1200 (flying restart on
= 1/off = 0). If flying restart is off (default setting) then the drive always starts with a
frequency of zero. If it is turning nevertheless then overcurrents may result.
NOTICE
Under certain conditions during encoderless operation there may be a delay between the
command to enable operation and operation itself. This occurs when
the drive is operating without an encoder
the flying restart function is active
the motor terminals are temporarily disconnected from the converter by a switch.
In this case, the closed-loop control loses the voltage and speed information and must resynchronize itself. This process may take up to 30 seconds.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
249
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Residual tacho
If operating without a rotary transducer, the speed is estimated from the motor voltages.
Since these voltages can be very low and reduce with reducing speed there is a minimum
speed for each motor, from which the speed is displayed as zero.
P6702[0] Lower standstill threshold (default = 2% of rated motor speed)
P6702[1] Upper standstill threshold (default = 3% of rated motor speed)
NOTICE
These thresholds affect the flying restart function and should only be changed if
problems are encountered when adding drives at low speeds.
6.4.5
Automatic restart
Description
The automatic restart (WEA) starts the drive/drive group automatically when power is
restored after a power failure. All faults are automatically acknowledged and the drive is
powered-up again. This function is not only restricted to line supply faults; it can also be used
to automatically acknowledge faults and to restart the motor after any fault trips. The "flying
restart" function is activated internally so that the drive can be connected to a rotating motor
shaft.
WARNING
Death, serious injury or material damage can result if motors start up unexpectedly.
If p1210 is set to a value > 1, the motors can start automatically once the power supply has
been restored. This is especially critical, if, after longer line supply failures, motors come to
a standstill (zero speed) and it is incorrectly assumed that they have been powered-down.
Ensure that the motor cannot start unexpectedly.
Note
The converter may optionally be fitted with the VSM 10 line voltage sensing module (Option
L32) in order to safely detect the return of the power supply after a power failure of any
duration and restore operational readiness.
The VSM10 is always assigned to the DO of the infeed, i.e. DFEMV. The automatic restart
itself is in the DO VECTORMV.
An uninterruptible power supply (Option L53) must be used if the converter is to restart
automatically after failure of the electronics power supply.
250
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Reduction in i/c
voltage without
line contactor
fault shutdown
Pre-charge
of i/c
,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH
Reduction in i/c
voltage (precharge off)
Pulse block
initiated by
FPGA
Reduction in i/c
voltage (precharge off)
Ready
to run
Pre-charge
of i/c
Charging of i/c
by pre-charge
Power restore
7LPHD[LV
Figure 6-24
Hot Standby
This diagram explains its function. The power supply may be restored at any time.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
251
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHZLWKOLQH
FRQWDFWRUIDXOW
VKXWGRZQ
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHSUH
FKDUJHRII
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHSUH
FKDUJHRII
5HGXFWLRQLQLF
YROWDJHDV
UHVXOWRISRZHU
UHVWRUH
&RQQHFWLQJ
WKHOLQHFRQWDFWRU
~
~
3UHFKDUJLQJ
WKHLF
:($HQGHG
,QWHUPHGLDWHFLUFXLWYROWDJHDVRIUDWHGYROWDJH
3UHFKDUJLQJ
WKHLF
:($EHFRPHVDFWLYH
$IWHU
IDXOWVKXWGRZQ
7LPHD[LV
Figure 6-25
WEA mode
Mode
Description
252
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Startup
1. Activate the function for drive object vector and infeed.
2. Set the WEA mode (p1210)
3. If necessary, set the BICOs (p1208)
4. Set the delay times (p1212, p1213)
5. Check the function.
r6530
p1208 BI
r0046
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
253
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameters
Description
p1210
p1212
p1213
p1214
Signaling
Automatic restart is indicated by alarm message A07321 "Drive: Automatic restart active".
A digital output signal must also be provided to indicate the beginning of the restart e.g.
optically by a warning light or acoustically by a buzzer.
The alarm message on restart is only generated if the motor is (almost) stationary, threshold:
100 rpm.
254
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
3RZHU2Q
$5)LVDFWLYHZKHQS
+RW6WDQG%\
+6%\LVDFWLYHZKHQS
$,1,7
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
7KHFRPPLVVLRQLQJLVEHLQJ
H[HFXWHG,QYHUQDOYDULDEOH
LQLWLDOL]DWLRQ
3
$Q\6WDWH
3 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
3
3UHFKDUJHFRQWURO
&RPPLVVLRQLQJUHDG\
$FWLYDWHSUHFKDUJHLQ
WZRSRLQWFRQWUROPRGH
ZKHQ3
0DGHZLWKKHOSRI%,&2
&,'/(
3 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
2)) 25
3
:DLWIRU2QFRPPDQGDQG
ZDLWIRUHUURU
$5)UHVWDUWVWKHGULYHRQO\
LI$5)LVDFWLYH$1'DQ
HUURULVDFWLYH$1'DQ2Q
FRPPDQG
3
3UHFKDUJH
3
3
$ODUP$FN
3
$FNQRZOHGJH$ODUPV
ZKHQS
,PSOHPHQWHGZLWK
LQWHUQDOFRQQHFWLRQVDQG
ZLWK%,&2
3
3! $1'
8'&8QGHUYROWDJH
3 $1'
)DFWLYH
$Q\DFWLYHHUURUS$1'
3
$WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH
$OKKDQGOHU
3
-+6%<:$,7
&RGH
&RGH
3>@
3
*ULGYROWDJH2.
7LPHUS6WDUW
:DLWIRUVLJQDO
6XS6HT5HDG\LWUHSRUWV
WKHJULGYROWDJHLVW2.
SXOVHVFRXOGEHUHHQDEOHG
3
:DUQLQJ
6HWVLJQDO'ULYHZLOO
DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUW
ZKHQWLPHUUXQV
DQGZKHQ3
*:$,73
VWDUWWLPHUE\UHTXHVW$1'
ZKHQS
VWRSWLPHUZKHQ$5)LQ
,'/(VWDWHLV
:DLWEHIRUHHUURUFOHDU
WLPHGHWHUPLQHGE\S
6WDUWWLPHS
*ULGYROWDJH2.
3
70
WLPHURYHUIORZ
&RGH
7LPHURYHUIORZ
,36$48,7
0RWRU6HT
*HQHUDWHVTXLWFRPPDQG
RQO\IRU36$WRH[LWIURP
SXOVHGLVDEOHGVWDWH
3
ZLWKRXW960
6XSSUHVVHUURU)LI
+RW6WDQG%\UXQV
3
ZLWK960
0RGLI\FRGH
'RQRWUHVWDUWWLPHU
&RGH
$WOHDVWRQHHUURUSUHVHQWV
'$&.)$8/7
(UURUFOHDUVWDWH
3
$FNDOOHUURUV
$WOHDVWRQHHUURU
SUHVHQWV
&RGH
($5))$8/7
6HW(UURU)DGGLWLRQDO
LQIR &RGH
6WRSWLPHUS
3
$WOHDVWRQHQHZ
HUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH
$WOHDVWRQHQHZ
HUURUSUHVHQWV
&RGH
1RHUURU
1RHUURU
)*(121&0'
2QFRPPDQGJHQHUDWLRQ
IRU0RWRU6HTXHQFHU
3
)LVDFNQRZOHGJHGE\XVHU
5HPDLQLQJYDOXHRIWLPHU33
&RGH
6XSSO\6HTUHDG\
+:$51,1*
$WOHDVWRQHQHZHUURU
SUHVHQWV
&RGH
6WRSWLPHUS
:DUQLQJIRUXVHU'ULYHZLOO
DXWRPDWLFDOO\UHVWDUW
6WDUWWLPHS
3
3
DFWLYDWH
)O\UHVWDUWFRQWURO
3 25
7LPHUWLPHRXW25
0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ
3 25
7LPHUWLPHRXW25
0RWRUVSHHG3!WXUQPLQ
6WDUWIO\UHVWDUWIXQFWLRQE\
UHTXHVW6WRSLWZKHQWKH
SXOVHVDUHHQDEOHG$1'
+RW6WDQG%\LVLQDFWLYH
(QDEOHSXOVHV
)O\UHVWDUW
.021,725
0RWRUVHT
:DLWLQJDVKRUWWLPH
VHFWREHVXUHWKHGULYH
UXQVZLWKRXWHUURUWKH
UHVWDUWZDVVXFFHVIXOO
3
7LPHUWLPHRXW
Figure 6-26
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
255
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.6
Bypass function
Description
The bypass function "Synchronization with overlapping" can be used during vector control
and with induction motors without encoders.
It functions as a controller of two circuit breakers via digital outputs of the converter and
evaluates the check-back signals of the circuit-breakers via digital inputs (e.g. via TM15).
This circuit allows the motor to be operated using the converter or directly on the supply line.
The circuit breakers are activated by the converter. The check-back signals for the circuit
breaker positions have to be returned to the converter.
When the bypass function (parameter p1260=1) is activated, the motor is synchronized and
transferred to the power system and then retrieved. During the changeover, both circuit
breakers K1 and K2 are closed at the same time for a period (phase lock synchronization). A
throttle is used to uncouple the converter voltage and power system voltage, the uk value for
the throttle is 10 % +/- 2 %.
.
.
Figure 6-27
The bypass is also shut down when one of the "OFF2" or "OFF3" control word signals is
canceled.
Exception to this:
The bypass switch can be locked as needed by a higher-level controller in such a manner
that the converter can be completely (i.e. including the control electronics) shutdown
while the motor is driven on the power system. The circuit breaker locking must be carried
out on the system side.
When a converter is restarted after POWER OFF, the status of the bypass circuit breaker
is evaluated. This allows the converter to switch directly to "ready to switch on" mode
256
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
after powering up. This is only possible if the bypass is activated via a control signal and
the control signal (p1266) is still on after the power up.
A change of the converter into "ready to switch on and bypass" mode after power up has
a higher priority than the automatic restart.
The two motor switches must be designed for switching under load.
Requirements
The bypass function is only possible during encoder-less speed control (p1300 = 20) and
with the use of an induction motor.
For synchronization with over-lapping, a VSM10 must be used.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
257
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-28
Via parameter p0108.16, you can check whether the technology controller function module
has been successfully activated (2).
Figure 6-29
In addition, macro 1582 must be executed in parameter p0015 for the bypass option (p0015
= 1582).
Example:
After the bypass function with synchronization with over-lapping (p1260 = 1) is activated, the
following parameters must also be set:
258
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Table 6-33
Parameter setting
Parameter
Description
p1266 =
p1269[0] =
p1269[1] =
p3800 = 1
p3801 = 2
P6674[1]
...
p6689[1]
P6674[2]
...
p6689[2]
0RWRU
RQWKH
FRQYHUWHU
&KDQJHRYHU
SURFHGXUH
&RQYHUWHUSRZHU
VXSSO\V\VWHP
0RWRU
FRQQHFWHGWRVXSSO\
V\VWHP
&KDQJHRYHU
SURFHGXUH
3RZHUVXSSO\
V\VWHPFRQYHUWHU
0RWRU
RQWKHFRQYHUWHU
SE\SDVVFRPPDQG
U
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQUHTXHVWHG
E\E\SDVVIXQFWLRQ
U
6\QFKURQLVPDFKLHYHG
U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG
U
&ORVHFRQWDFWRU.
S
&RQWDFWRU.FORVHG
Figure 6-30
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
259
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
After the motor has been successfully synchronized to the line frequency, line voltage
and line phase, the synchronizing algorithm reports this status (r3819.2).
The bypass mechanism evaluates this signal and closes switch K2 (r1261.1 = 1).
Once switch K2 has reported "closed" status (r1269[1] = 1), switch K1 is opened and the
converter blocks the pulse. The converter is in Ready to Operate and bypass state.
If the ON command in this phase is taken away, the converter changes to the basic
"Ready to Switch On" status. The converter is separated from the line and the DC circuit
is discharged.
Parameter
Description
Bypass function
p1260
Bypass configuration
r1261
p1266
p1268
p1269
Synchronization
p3800
260
p3801
p3802
r3803t
r3804
r3805
p3806
r3808
p3809
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter
Description
p3811
r3812
p3813
r3814
p3815
r3819
P6670[1]...p6690[1]
Switch 1
P6670[2]...p6690[2]
Switch 2
6.4.7
Staging function
6.4.7.1
Introduction
The bypass control is used in so-called "staging" applications.
Description
With staging, the flow rate of a pump station, for example, is divided among several motors.
All the motors can either be at rest, be controlled at the converter or run strictly on the infeed
line. There is only one converter for the entire system.
To set the flow rate, the required number of motors are powered up and switched to the line
using the bypass function. An additional motor can operate continuously on the converter
and it can stagelessly regulate the flow rate. If more output is required than the regulated
motor can deliver, it is connected to the line via the bypass function and an additional motor
is started using the now available converter. Conversely, the output can be reduced by
stopping the regulated motor and retrieving a line-driven motor, which is then regulated.
External control
For the required switching procedures, one line-side bypass switch and one converter-side
bypass switch is required for each motor. The switch-over between the individual motors is
coordinated by an external controller. Just as for a normal bypass, the converter detects only
one motor and controls its line-side and converter-side bypass switch.
The external controller's task is:
To connect to the converter the control and check-back signal of the two switches of the
motor that is currently supposed to be operated with the converter.
To keep the other motors in "Off" or "line mode" status.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
261
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
To supply the converter with the required control commands.
The figure shows an example for staging with 4 motors. (The "external controller" is not
shown separately. Instead, it is shown as a component of the "converter with VSM").
6LJQDOOLQHVIRUVZLWFKDFWLYDWLRQGLVSOD\HGLQVLPSOLILHGIRUP
6XSSO\V\VWHP
3URWHFWLYHHTXLSPHQW
&RQYHUWHUZLWK960
.
.
5HDFWRU
%XVEDU
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
Figure 6-31
.
.
.
There is a staging signal, which makes it possible to switch motors without operating the line
switch (staging without staging command).
6.4.7.2
Function Principle
The external controller connects the first motor with the converter to the line. Then it must
lock the line-side bypass switch in the "ON" status and completely shut down the converter.
Now the external controller can switch the control signals and feedback signals of the
switches to a different motor and switch on the converter again.
This motor can run in bypass or sit idle, because the converter firmware detects the status
when ramping up and its sequence control starts accordingly. The only prerequisite is that
the status must agree with the bypass setpoint command, otherwise a fault occurs.
The disadvantage of this however is that the converter must be completely shutdown during
each motor change, which can lead to very long change-over times and unnecessary wear
of the infeed switch, especially for large converters. To fulfill the requirements of staging, a
motor change must be possible in "ready for operation and bypass" status.
262
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.7.3
Introduction
To preclude the disadvantages of "staging without a staging command," staging command
BI p2369 is initiated. It has the following characteristics.
Characteristics
When the staging signal arrives, K1 is opened and the pulses are disabled.
As long as the staging signal remains pending, the monitoring systems of the bypass
switch check-back signals in the circuit-breaker control module are frozen (i.e., checkback signal "ON/OFF" is set internally as per the "ON/OFF" command, and all other
check-back signals are set internally to High.)
When the staging signal arrives, the "check" status is forced in the bypass sequencer.
This check reads the check-back signals of the bypass switches and compares them with
the bypass command (you can find more detailed information in the Section "Arrival of
Staging-signal").
Principle of operation
.
.
Figure 6-32
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
263
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
264
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.7.4
Initial state
For a motor change, the external controller must adhere to the following sequence. As an
example (switch designation), a change from motor 1 to motor 2 is described:
Initial state: The converter is switched on (STW1.0 = 1) or in the
ready to operate status, then K11 is closed and K21 is opened. The motor is at rest,
p1266 = 0
.
.
67$*,1*
.
.
0
Figure 6-33
0
or
status ready to operate and bypass, then K11 is opened and K21 is closed. The motor 1
is running in bypass, p1266 = 1.
.
.
67$*,1*
.
.
0
Figure 6-34
0
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
265
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Procedure
Lock the controller K21 in the ON status (only for initial status "ready to operate and
bypass")
Set the staging signal p2369.
The converter takes back the control from K1.
The control and check-back signals change from K11 and K21 to K12 and K22
If the motors have different characteristics, a motor data set change-over must be
carried out.
Set the command p1266 according to the status of motor 2.
Reset the staging signal p2369.
The converter controls switch K12 or K22 depending on the status of motor 2.
Only if motor 2 was in bypass: Release the lock of K22.
The converter now has control over motor 2 and can synchronize it to the line or
retrieve it from the line and continue to operate it (regulated) or stop it.
The following diagram clarifies the 4 possible transitions between 2 motors:
266
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU
0RWRU0RQWKHFRQYHUWHU
0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH
0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH
.
.
.
67$*,1*
.
67$*,1*
.
0
.
0
.
0
0
0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH
0RWRU0E\SDVVBPRGH
0RWRU0QRE\SDVVPRGH
0RWRU0E\SDVVPRGH
.
.
.
67$*,1*
0
.
67$*,1*
.
.
.
.
.
0
Figure 6-35
6.4.8
6.4.8.1
Description
0
0
This function supports options L51 "Output-side disconnector" and L52 "Output-side circuit
breaker".
The output-side disconnector increases the safety of staff, converter and motor, e.g. during
maintenance work. A disconnector or circuit breaker can also isolate the faulty system during
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
267
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
redundancy changeover. The switch used depends on the changeover time required or
whether there are higher isolation requirements.
Option L51 facilitates the "Safe torque off" function which frequently uses switching devices
between the converter and motor even in modern plant engineering systems. All safety
functions (e.g. disconnector off status message) are carried out using external modules (e.g.
protection-safety combinations). The drive only supports activation and deactivation of the
disconnector, which is coordinated by its own sequencer. The function described here
should therefore not be confused with the "Safe Torque Off" safety function of other
SINAMICS devices and for this reason is not relevant to certification.
Output-side circuit breaker L52 is, for example, not required in a permanent-magnet
synchronous motor (PEM). Unlike the disconnector, it also has the function of protecting the
converter. Unlike other types of motor, the PEM constantly discharges voltage if it is not
running. Feedback to the DC link, e.g. in case of a fault, can therefore only be prevented by
a switch between the converter and the motor. The same is true if the PEM is operating in
the field weakening range: with a pulse block field weakening is lost via the negative fieldgenerating current and the machine can discharge a terminal voltage which is far above the
rated voltage. This voltage may exceed the capacity of the converter and must therefore be
disconnected by a switch.
Dimensioning of the switch is project-dependent and must be appropriate for the application.
In particular, the circuit breaker must be dimensioned for the currents which may arise when
a fault occurs.
A disconnector can only switch very small currents. Therefore, it may be necessary to wait
until the current has fallen to almost zero before opening it. The main task is to disconnect
the electricity supply. Circuit breakers, on the other hand, can switch short-circuit currents.
The switch response occurs immediately on the switch command. The type of switch used
will depend on the option selected.
Overview
Both options L51 and L52 are realized separately and in principle may be selected together.
The diagram below gives an overview of the possible switches at the converter output
(together with option L29 "Bypass control").
268
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6XSSO\VLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
E\SDVV
3RZHU
VXSSO\
0RWRUVLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
2XWJRLQJ
LVRODWRU
0RWRUVLGH
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
E\SDVV
)LOWHU<
RU
UHDFWRU
,QYHUWHU
0RWRU
2SWLRQ/
2SWLRQ/
2SWLRQ/
6ZLWFK
70PRGXOH
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
6ZLWFK
7KHIHHGEDFNVLJQDOVIURPWKHVZLWFKHVDUHPRQLWRUHGE\%L&RLQSXWV
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
SPRQLWRUVVZLWFK
,IRQHRIWKHVHVZLWFKHVLVQRWSUHVHQWWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJELWLQSPXVWEHVHWWRGHIDXOW
7KHVXSSO\VLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHURIWKHPRWRULVXVHGWRFRQQHFWWKHPRWRUGLUHFWO\WRWKHSRZHUV\VWHPE\SDVV
7KHPRWRUVLGHFLUFXLWEUHDNHUE\SDVVPXVWZKHQVHHQIURPWKHFRQYHUWHUEHGRZQVWUHDPRIVZLWFKHVDQGWKHILOWHUUHDFWRU
Figure 6-36
6.4.8.2
Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Switching
status
Switching conditions
S1, S2
S3a
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
269
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Switching
status
Switching conditions
S3
S4
S5a, S5b
S7
As S1, S2:
BI1) = 0: Switch off when I=zero
BI1) = 1: no change of status
Fault:
1)
270
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
271
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-39
6.4.8.3
Description
The switching conditions for disconnection depend on the motor sequencer. Explanations of
S1... S7 are given in function diagram 2610 (see List Manual).
Unlike the disconnector, in all safety cutouts with OFF2 in which the converter is also
disconnected from the power supply, the circuit breaker must also switch off.
272
Switching
status
Switching conditions
S1, S2
S3a
S3
S3 is only reached from S3a when the output-side circuit breaker (ALS) is On
(feedback signal) AND BI = 1
BI1) = 0: Switch off
BI1) = 1: Switch on or cause to be switched on when switch-on conditions are
met .
Special case, only when p643 = 0 and PEM: BI1) = 1 and "n permissible"2) are
not met or an encoder fault is indicated: switch off
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Switching
status
Switching conditions
S4
S5a, S5b
S7
As S3:
BI1) = 0: Switch off
BI1) = 1: Switch on if switch-on conditions are met.
Fault:
1) BI
2) The
peak terminal voltage value is not significantly higher than the DC link voltage in order to
prevent large surge currents over the regenerative-circuit diodes of the inverter.
The circuit breaker switching status is applied as a switch-on condition in r0046 "Infeed
missing enable signal". Alarm A7919 is generated if
the switch is switched off (because the enable signal via p6717 is missing or because
PEM speed is too high), and if operation enable signal STWA.3 is set in status S3.
the switch should be switched on (in S3a, S3, S7) but the enable signal is missing
because the PEM speed is too high.
For the user, the actuation system described has the following features:
The BI must be set so that S3 Ready to run and S4 Running are reached when the
system is switched on.
In status S3 Ready to run, the ALS (output-side circuit breaker) may be switched on and
off as required like a disconnector using the BI. It must be switched on again before
operation.
In operating status S4, S5a and S5b the ALS cannot be switched off via the BI; this
prevents a "hard shut-down". If the user wishes to open the output-side circuit breaker
ALS as quickly as possible during operation, he must follow the normal switch-off
procedure and cancel first the operation command (STWA.3) then the on command
(STWA.0).
For all faults with response OFF2, the output-side switch is also switched off; this is also
the case for responses OFF1/3 if status S1 is reached from the fault once the system has
stopped.
In status S3, if the BI is set to 1 and the operation enable signal has been given but the
sequence controller has not yet activated the output-side circuit breaker (ALS) because
the PEM speed is too high, operation will restart without any further input from the user
once the speed has dropped.
6.4.8.4
Startup
Description
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
273
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Activate the function for the VectorMV drive object via p0015 or the starter.
Figure 6-40
274
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-41
Note
The parameterizations must be suitable for the disconnect switch.
Some parameters can only be changed when p9 = 3 is set in the object CU.
Figure 6-42
Motor-side LSS
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
275
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Figure 6-43
276
Parameter
Description
p15
p6717 BI
p0643
r6660-6692
Switch parameters
r0046[21]
Feedback switch
r0046[22]
Feedback switch
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
NOTICE
If the terminal voltage of the PEM (permanent-magnet motor) is too high when the motor
switch is switched on, the converter switches off using OFF2 and crowbar firing. Surge
currents on powering up may cause damage to the converter.
A rotary encoder is essential for overvoltage protection of the PEM.
At setting p0643 = 0 operation is impossible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
At setting p0643 = 1 operation is possible without a rotary encoder or if the encoder is
faulty.
Setting p0643 = 1 is only permissible if the dimensioning of the converter and motor and
the type of loading guarantee that the supply voltage generated by the PEM cannot exceed
the maximum permitted level.
A supply voltage which is higher than the permitted level may be produced under two
circumstances:
The closed-loop control system is operating the PEM above the rated speed in the field
weakening range. If a pulse block occurs (during operation or after a fault), the PEM
generates a terminal voltage which is higher than the rated voltage
The load itself can accelerate the idling motor over its rated speed
If one of these circumstances occurs, the overvoltage protection must not be switched off
with p0643 = 1. The motor must be operated with a rotary encoder.
Fit the system with a rotary encoder as described above if the dimensioning and
dynamometer cannot prevent these non-permissible terminal voltages from occurring in the
PEM.
Signaling
A missing enable signal for the motor switch/disconnector is indicated by alarm A07919.
If the switch is enabled, it switches on. The alarm is acknowledged.
6.4.9
Description
For heavy starting the switching frequency can be reduced to minimize losses when using
the motor inverter at low output frequencies.
The switching frequency is reduced linearly and incrementally for output frequencies below a
parameterizable threshold. The number of reduction steps can also be parameterized. The
factory setting is that switching frequency is not active initially (number of reduction steps
p6975 = 0, output frequency threshold p6976 = 0 Hz).
The frequency range below the frequency threshold p6976 is divided into ranges of equal
size. The number of ranges corresponds to the number of reduction steps p6975 (maximum
5). The user determines the initial reduction of switching frequency by choosing the number
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
277
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
of reduction steps. 5 reduction steps mean an initial reduction rate of 5 (switching frequency
reduced by 50%), 4 reduction steps an initial reduction rate of 4 (40%), etc.
If the output frequency increases, the switching frequency is reduced by less and less until
the rated switching frequency is reached on exceeding the threshold.
'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ
1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG
'HJUHHRIUHGXFWLRQ
1XPEHURIUHGXFWLRQVWDJHV
2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\>+]@
)UHTXHQF\WKUHVKROG
Figure 6-44
Example: Switching frequency reduction for two different numbers of reduction steps
The maximum parameterizable output frequency threshold depends on the set rated
switching frequency and is automatically limited when parameterization is unsuitable.
Irrespective of the parameterization, the switching frequency reduction remains restricted to
space vector approximation (SVA) mode, i.e. the switching frequency reduction has no effect
once it leaves the SVA range.
Fine adjustment factor p6961 is available except for incremental switching frequency
reduction. Thus the switching frequency in the entire SVA range can be multiplied by a fixed
factor between 0.8 and 1.2.
278
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
6.4.10
p6975
p6976
p6961
Description
The friction characteristic curve compensates for the friction torque of the motor and the
driven machine. A friction characteristic curve enables the speed controller to be precontrolled and improves the response.
10 interpolation points are used for each friction characteristic curve. The coordinates of an
interpolation point are described by a speed (p382x) and a torque parameter (p383x)
(interpolation point 1 = p3820 and p3830).
Characteristics
10 interpolation points are available for mapping the friction characteristic curve.
An automatic function allows you to record the friction characteristic curve (record friction
characteristic curve).
A connector output (r3841) can be applied as friction torque (p1569).
The friction characteristic curve can be activated and deactivated (p3842).
Parameter
s
Description
p3820
...
p3839
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
279
Start
Functions
6.4 Drive Functions
Parameter
s
Description
r3840
r3841
p3842
p3845
280
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
6.5
6.5.1
Block protection
Description
The error message "Motor blocked" is only triggered if the speed of the drive is below the
variable speed threshold set in p2175. For vector control the speed controller must also be at
the limit.
Once the ON delay (p2177) has elapsed, the message "Motor blocked" and fault F7900 are
generated.
USP
S
QBDFW
QBDFWS
U
S!9HFWRUFRQWUROV
S!9IFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQWUROPRGH
S
6SHHGFRQWUROOHUDWOLPLW
U
&XUUHQWOLPLWUHDFKHG
U
Figure 6-45
0RWRUORFNHG
U
)
S
V
21GHOD\
Block protection
Parameters
Description
p2175
p2177
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
281
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
6.5.2
Description
The main task of motor protection is to identify critical situations. If alarm thresholds are
exceeded, the user can set parameterizable response options (p0610) that enable continued
operation (e.g. with reduced power) and prevent immediate shutdown.
12t motor monitoring can be activated without a temperature sensor. This does not
reduce power.
Values measured by motor temperature sensors can be obtained and monitored by
connecting and evaluating temperature modules by means of terminal modules.
Automatic power reduction can take place based on these actual values.
I2t monitoring
The functionality is activated using parameter p6550. The alarm and fault thresholds can be
entered in parameters p0605 and p0604. Parameter p0606 is used to enter a time stage
which also triggers a fault if the alarm threshold is continuously exceeded.
For 12t monitoring, the thermal time constant of the motor p6653 must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to reach 98% of its rated temperature at rated voltage, rated current,
rated frequency and ambient temperature. Additionally, in a self-cooled motor (p0335 = 0)
the cooling time constant when stationary p6654 that is entered must be 1/4 of the time
required by the motor to cool from rated temperature to ambient temperature.
Furthermore, for self-cooled machines, a capacity utilization characteristic curve for
operation at less than rated speed must be entered using parameters p6555, p6556 and
p6557.
Power reduction
This functionality enables thermal monitoring of two motor temperature sensors. These are
imported via a terminal module and connected to connectors p0603.0 and p0603.1. A
characteristic curve for temperature-dependent power reduction to 75% can be established
using parameters p0616 and p0618 together with p0617 and p0619. The reduction output
value is connected to power limiting p1555; an alarm or fault is triggered when the thresholds
are reached.
282
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Parameters
Description
r0035
p0603
p0610
p0616
p0617
p0618
p0619
r0034
Motor load
r0066
Output frequency
r0068
p0305
p0335
p0604
p0605
p0606
p6550
p6651
6.5.3
p6652
p6653
p6654
p6655
p6656
p6657
Description
This function is an extension of the "circuit breaker actuation" feature.
The software includes two counters per circuit breaker which record circuit breaker switching
operations under load and without load. The two counter readings are added and compared
with a freely parameterizable threshold (p6710), then an alarm is generated (F7322).
Two thresholds (p6710 and p6711) and therefore two alarms (F7322 and F7323) are
provided. The first alarm warns the user that the service life of the circuit breaker is nearing a
critical range. The second alarm indicates that the critical range has been reached.
No fault is displayed when the second threshold is exceeded because it is sufficient to
display the parameters in the experts list. The parameter values are saved in the PSA after
every change to the counter readings.
There are three different converter and circuit breaker combinations:
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
283
Start
Functions
6.5 Monitoring and protective functions
Table 6-40
GM 150
New
New
Used
Circuit breaker
New
Used
New
Condition description
Conditio
n
Description
The counters are in the zero position and the appropriate counter increments after each
switching operation.
For the used circuit breaker, the number of switching cycles with and without load must be
estimated and entered in the appropriate parameters (p6710, p6711).
This also applies if the converter PSA is changed.
The counter positions must be read from the "old" PSA and transferred to the "new" one.
The counter for the new circuit breaker must be returned to zero. Access level 3 is
required to do this.
The setting parameters (p6710, p6711) are available from access level 3, whereas the
visualization parameters may be accessed from level 1.
An available line side switch may be used in retrofit systems. Three parameters are therefore
provided for modifying counter readings.
The first parameter (p6714) contains the number of load-free switching cycles.
The second (p6715) contains the number of switching cycles under load.
The third parameter is used to transfer these two values.
Transfer of these parameter values is only permitted at access level 3.
Counter conditions
Whether switching should take place with or without load depends on the type of
disconnection.
Operational disconnection (OFF1 and OFF3) counts as switching without load.
Fault shutdown (OFF2 response) counts as switching under load.
A factor can be set using p6712 to take account of the higher loading on the circuit breaker
when switching under load. This factor affects the reading on the "switching cycles under
load" counter.
Startup
Set the parameters correctly.
284
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameter
s
Description
p6710
p6711
p6712
p6713
p67141)
p67151)
1)
Signaling
Table 6-42
Alarm message
Description
A07322
A07323
6.6
6.6.1
Redundancy mode
6.6.1.1
Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite failure of a Control
Unit (CU320).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
285
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
GM 150 -1
$/6
&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU
7UDQVI
$/6
6
*5
GM 150 -2
:5
:5
*5
7UDQVI
&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU
&%
FRQWURO
3UHFKDUJH
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
PSA 1
PSA 2
+%2Q
I/O
X101
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 15
X102
C U 32 0-2
X100
C U 32 0-1
X100
TM 15
X103
TM 15
L 52
&%
FRQWURO
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
+%2Q
I/O
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
3UHFKDUJH
X101
X103
PB
PB
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31
U DC,
VWDWH
TM 15
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
TM 15
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 31
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
X102
L 52
TM 15
,QWHUUXSWV
PB
3/&
Figure 6-46
286
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Characteristics
Redundancy for up to 2 Control Units (GM150, CU320)
Redundancy mode may be selected using parameter (p7004)
Redundancy mode may be selected via binector input (p7006)
The active DRIVE-CLIQ ports are readable via r109
Prerequisites
Functionality available with order number 6SL3835-2LN43-6AR00.
Maximum 2 Control Units.
Minimum firmware release 2.5.
PLC and configuration required.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
287
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
0DVWHU
6ODYH
3
GM 150 -1
$/6
&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU
7UDQVI
$/6
6
*5
GM 150 -2
:5
:5
*5
7UDQVI
&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU
&%
FRQWURO
3UHFKDUJH
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
PSA 1
PSA 2
+%2Q
I/O
TM 15
X103
TM 15
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 15
C U 32 0-2
X102
X100
C U 32 0-1
X100
X101
L 52
&%
FRQWURO
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
+%2Q
I/O
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
3UHFKDUJH
X101
X102
X103
PB
PB
L 52
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31
U DC,
VWDWH
TM 15
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
TM 15
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 31
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
TM 15
,QWHUUXSWV
PB
3/&
Figure 6-47
Master-slave configuration
288
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
CU 320 - 2: P7004 = Stand-Alone
M
'ULYH
'ULYH
3
GM 150 -1
$/6
&LUFXLW
3 EUHDNHU
7UDQVI
$/6
6
*5
GM 150 -2
:5
:5
*5
7UDQVI
&LUFXLW
EUHDNHU
&%
FRQWURO
3UHFKDUJH
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
X20 0
X20 1
X20 2
3XOOZLUH
PSA 1
PSA 2
+%2Q
I/O
TM 15
X103
TM 15
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 15
C U 32 0-2
X102
X100
C U 32 0-1
X100
X101
L 52
&%
FRQWURO
36$
)DQZDWHU
FRQGXFWLYLW\
FRQWUROOHU'&&%2II
GRRU
+%2Q
I/O
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
3UHFKDUJH
X101
X102
X103
PB
PB
L 52
VWDWH
5.(/('
SXVKEXWWRQ
'&
,62
:DUQ)DXOW
TM 15
7HUPLQDO
LQWHUIDFH
TM 31
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH
TM 15
,QW:
6:WHUPLQDO
GRRUUHOHDVH TM 31
U DC,
TM 15
,QWHUUXSWV
PB
3/&
Figure 6-48
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
289
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
6.6.1.2
Description
Redundancy mode can be used to enable operation to continue despite the failure of one
power unit connected in parallel. The DRIVE-CLiQ cables must be connected radially so that
the failed power unit can be replaced. It may be necessary to use a DRIVE-CLiQ HUB
Module (DMC20). The failed power unit must be deactivated via p0125 or via the binector
input p0895, before it is removed. When a replacement power unit has been installed it must
be activated accordingly.
Characteristics
Redundancy for up to 3 power units.
Power unit can be de-activated via parameter (p0125)
Power unit can be de-activated via binector input (p0895).
Prerequisites
Maximum number of parallel power units is 3.
Minimum firmware release 2.5.
Parallel connection of power units with suitable power reserves.
6.6.2
Description
Switching power units in parallel is a simple method of extending the power spectrum of
drives beyond the power of the individual power units.
Characteristics
The converter supports the parallel connection of power units on the motor side in order to
extend the power spectrum.
The main features of parallel circuits are:
Parallel circuits with up to three power units on one motor with separate winding systems.
290
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Simple commissioning because no special parameterization is necessary. Only the MLFB
number of the converter is relevant.
The power units connected in parallel must be connected to the same CU.
Individual power units can be diagnosed (troubleshooting) via p7100 ff.
Startup
During commissioning, power units connected in parallel are treated like a power unit on the
motor side. With parallel connection, the parameter display for the actual values changes
only slightly. Instead, suitable "total values" are derived from the individual values for the
power units.
In STARTER, parallel connection of the motor module is activated via the Wizard. You can
also select parallel connection when choosing the power unit.
6.6.3
Parameters
Description
p0120
p0121
r7000
r7001
r7002
p7003
p7010
p7011
p7222-p7229
p7230-p7235
Brake controller
Description
The brake controller enables regenerative operation of an electric machine.
The following points should be noted when commissioning the brake controller:
Check whether p6822.0 is nonzero. If so, enter the brake controller resistance (p6811)
and finish commissioning.
Check that p6816 is connected to r0082.0
Check that p6826 = 0.
Check that p6814 is connected to p6813
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
291
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
If Vdc max control is enabled for the machine (p1240 = 1) check that p6813 is at least 3
% smaller than p1241
Test mode can be activated using p6650 = 30.
An actuation signal (positive edge on p6651) starts pre-charging. On reaching the DC
link voltage setpoint, the brake controller synchronizes with the modulation ranges
specified in p6815.0 /.1. The falling partial DC link voltages (r0070.1 /.2) can be
recorded and checked using the starter trace.
6.6.4
p6811
p6812
p6813
p6814
p6815
p6816
p6817
p6818
p6819
p6820
p6821
r6822
r6823
p6824
p6825
p6826
p6827
Recooling unit
Characteristics
Control and monitoring functions of a recooling unit
Automatically activated when using water-cooled power units
292
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Evaluation of a leakage water sensor (p0266.4)
Evaluation of a water flow sensor (p0266.5, p0260, p0263)
Evaluation of a conductivity sensor (p0266.6, p0266.7, p0261, p0262, p268, p269, p270)
Monitoring the water intake temperature using internal temperature sensors (p6299)
Parameterizable ramp-down time (p264)
Recooling unit test mode (p6650, p6651)
Description
A recooling unit (RKA) is responsible for cooling and (non-) conductivity in the de-ionized
water cooling circuit of a water-cooled power unit. The unit is controlled and monitored by a
PLC which is part of the recooling unit. The "recooling unit" function module described here
forms an interface between the closed-loop control and the external control (open-loop)
(PLC) of the recooling unit. The recooling unit is controlled via terminals (e.g. Control Unit,
TM31).
Conductivity may be monitored via a sensor which provides an analog signal which is read
by the PSA (presetting) or by a sensor which provides two digital signals (conductivity alarm
threshold/fault threshold exceeded) which are read by the TM or CU via BICO connections.
When evaluating the analog value, the recooling unit function module constantly monitors
the conductivity of the de-ionized water. If the alarm threshold is exceeded, the module
automatically switches the recooling unit on and switches it off again when the level has
fallen below the alarm threshold by one hysteresis value.
The de-ionized water intake temperature is monitored constantly.
If it falls below a fixed value of 5C, the recooling unit switches on automatically to
prevent the water from freezing. It does not switch off until the temperature has risen
above a fixed value of 7C.
An OFF2 is generated if it exceeds the fault threshold 1 value (hardware description
data). However, the recooling unit does not switch off until the temperature has fallen
below the fault threshold by a fixed hysteresis value of 2K.
If it exceeds the value for fault threshold 2 (fault threshold 1 + 2K), the recooling unit is
switched off immediately.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299).
The fault triggered when evaluating a leakage can be re-parameterized into an alarm signal.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
293
Figure 6-49
294
5.(2Q
U
U U
62SHUDWLRQ
5.(:DWHUIORZ2.
U
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ
U
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U
S
S
S
U
6)DXOW
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW
U
S
5.(1ROHDNDJH U
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U
5.(1RIDXOW U
U
5.(:DWHUIORZ2.
5.$1ROHDNDJH U
5.(1RIDXOW
U
5.(1ROHDNDJH
U
U U
6:DLWIRU
DFNQRZOHGJHPHQW
5.$1RIDXOW U
5.$2Q U
5.(:DWHUIORZ2. U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW U
U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW
U U
6:DLWIRU
SRZHUXSIHHGEDFNVLJQDOV
5.(2Q
U
5.(1ROHDNDJH
U
5.(1RIDXOW
U
5.(6ZLWFKHGRQ U
5.($FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
U
5.(:DWHUIORZ2. U
5.(&RQGXFWLYLW\QRIDXOW U
S
U U
65HDG\WRSRZHUXS
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
6.6.5
Parameters
Description
r0046.07
p0260
p0261
p0262
p0263
p0264
r0265
p0266[0...7]
r0267
r0268
p0269
p0270
p6299
p6650
p6651
Fan control
Characteristics
Fan control and monitoring functions
Automatically activated when using air-cooled power units.
Option of two fan classes: Main fan and redundant main fan.
Optional evaluation of one motor protection switch per fan class (p6798, p6799).
Optional evaluation of one speed monitoring system per fan class (p6798, p6799).
Optional monitoring of pressure differential (presetting) with maximum of two pressure
differential sensors. (p6790, p6791, ...p6796, p6801).
Operating hours counter for main fan and redundant main fan (p251, p252).
Monitoring of intake air temperature using internal temperature sensors (p6299).
Parameterizable ramp-down time (p6797).
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
295
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Separate test mode for main fan and redundant main fan (p6650, p6651) without rampdown time.
Description
The fans are responsible for cooling an air-cooled power unit. They are actuated via
terminals (e.g. Control Unit, TM31). The fan control function module actuates the fans and
monitors the feedback signals.
The fan monitoring configuration uses a configuration word in the hardware description data
which can be read using the IBS tool (p6802).
The fans are normally monitored by one or two pressure differential sensors. The pressure
differential is monitored statically for fault and alarm thresholds and dynamically for changes
in pressure differential.
Slow changes in pressure differential are also monitored to provide advance warning of
pollution of the filter mats.
The actual differential pressure values are also monitored to detect wire breakage.
All threshold values are preset via hardware description data and may be adjusted via
Commissioning - Tools (Starter, Scout, OP) .
The fan motor protection switch and/or fan speed may also be monitored as an option. If
pressure differential monitoring is active, only one alarm is generated when these feedback
signals are missing. If there is no pressure differential monitoring, a fault is generated if fan
feedback signals are missing.
The redundant fan is automatically activated if a redundant fan is configured and the
pressure differential alarm threshold is not reached on starting the main fan, or the alarm
threshold is not reached during operation, or feedback signals from the fan speed monitoring
system or motor protection switches are missing. An alarm signal will be generated.
In order to guarantee availability, the redundant fan will be switched on for a set period at
regular intervals during operation of the main fan. The frequency of duration of operation are
specified in the hardware description data. No alarm signal is given during this cyclical
operation.
The intake temperature is also monitored at a maximum alarm threshold (p6299) and a fault
threshold (hardware description data).
296
p0251
p0252
p6299
p6650
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.6 Hardware-related optional functions
Parameters
6.6.6
Description
p6651
p6790
p6791
p6792
p6793
p6794
p6795
p6796
p6797
p6798
p6799
p6800
p6801
p6802
Description
The ancillary fans are responsible for cooling the control cabinet and for additional cooling of
the rectifier cabinet, the inverter cabinet and the braking controller cabinet.
The function module monitors the fans while they are running. As no hardware configuration
word is defined, unassigned binary feedback signals must be permanently set to high.
(X222.8, X222.5, X222.4 or X222.1 to 24V or PSA simulation mode).
Monitoring is activated
by feedback from the fan contactor or
by a report from the PSA that the high-speed grounding switch has been triggered.
When the fans are being monitored via the motor protection switch, the binary input for the
fan protection feedback must be set permanently high (X221.4 to24V or PSA simulation
mode).
Ancillary fans that are in test mode can be switched on and off from the function module via
the PSA.
Characteristics
The ancillary fans are monitored irrespective of the type of cooling.
The ancillary fans are switched on by the PT100 evaluator or the PSA if the high-speed
grounding switch has been triggered.
Up to four fan speed or motor protection switch reports from the ancillary fan (control
cabinet, rectifier, inverter and brake chopper) are monitored via digital inputs on the PSA.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
297
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
One digital input on the PSA is monitored for overheating fault reports from the PT100
evaluator.
One digital input on the PSA is for fan contactor feedback from the PT100 evaluator to
activate fan speed monitoring.
A function test can be performed on the ancillary fans by doing a test run.
Function diagrams
None
Parameter
s
Description
p6650
p6651
6.7
Function modules
6.7.1
Function modules
Description
A function module is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated during
commissioning.
298
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameter
s
Description
r0107
p0108
p0124
6.7.2
Technology controller
6.7.2.1
Description/Commissioning
Description
The technology controller is designed as a PID controller,
whereby the differentiator can be switched to the control deviation channel or the actual
value channel (factory setting).
The P, I, and D components can be set separately. A value of 0 deactivates the
corresponding component.
Setpoints can be specified via two connector inputs. The setpoints can be scaled via
parameters (p2255 and p2256). A ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel can be
used to set the setpoint ramp-up/ramp-down time via parameters p2257 and p2258. The
setpoint and actual value channel each have a smoothing element. The smoothing time
can be set via parameters p2261 and p2265.
The setpoints can be specified via separate fixed setpoints (p2201 to p2215), the
motorized potentiometer, or via the field bus (e.g. PROFIBUS).
Pre-control can be integrated via a connector input.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
299
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
The output can be scaled via parameter p2295 and the control direction reversed. It can
be limited via parameters p2291 and p2292 and interconnected as required via a
connector output (r2294).
The actual value can be integrated, for example, via an analog input on the TB30.
If a PID controller has to be used for control reasons, the D component is switched to the
setpoint/actual value difference (p2263 = 1) unlike in the factory setting. This is always
necessary when the D component is to be effective, even if the reference variable changes.
The D component can only be activated when p2274 > 0.
Characteristics
Simple control functions can be implemented with the technology controller, e.g.:
Level control
Temperature control
Dancer position control
Pressure control
Flow control
Simple closed-loop control without higher-level controller
Tension control
The technology controller features:
Two scalable setpoints
Scalable output signal
Separate fixed values
Separate motorized potentiometer
The output limits can be activated and deactivated via the ramp-function generator.
The D component can be switched to the control deviation or actual value channel.
The motorized potentiometer of the technology controller is only active when the drive
pulses are enabled.
6.7.2.2
Examples
300
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
This is carried out by means of a variable-speed pump in conjunction with a sensor for
measuring the level.
The level is determined via an analog input (e.g. AI0 on TB30) and sent to the technology
controller. The level setpoint is defined in a fixed setpoint. The resulting controlled variable is
used as the setpoint for the speed controller.
6HQVRU
; DFW
Figure 6-50
;6HW
5DPSIXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU
7HFBUHJ
6HWSRLQW
S
Figure 6-51
QBVHW
S
7HFBUHJW\SH
S
;$FW
$FWXDOYDOXH
S
7HFBUHJ7Q
S
G
GW
Paramete Description
rs
Example
p1155
p2200
p2253
p2263
p2264
p2280
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
301
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
6.7.2.3
Paramete Description
rs
Example
p2285
p2201[0..n]
...
p2215[0..n]
p2220[0..n]
p2221[0..n]
p2222[0..n]
p2223[0..n]
p2230[0..n]
p2235[0..n]
p2236[0..n]
p2237[0..n]
p2238[0..n]
p2240[0..n]
r2245
p2247[0..n]
p2248[0..n]
r2250 CO:
302
p2200
p2253[0..n]
p2254 [0..n]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
Parameters
Description
p2255
p2256
p2257
p2258
p2261
p2263
p2264[0..n]
p2265
p2280
p2285
p2289[0..n]
p2295
6.7.3
6.7.3.1
Characteristics/Commissioning
Characteristics
When the extension is activate, the monitoring functions are extended as follows:
Speed setpoint monitoring: |n_setp| p2161
Speed setpoint monitoring: n_set > 0
Load monitoring
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
303
Start
Functions
6.7 Function modules
S
7RUTXH>1P@
S
S
S
7RUTXH
DFWXDOYDOXH
S
S
S
S
S
S
U
%LW
$
S
Figure 6-52
6SHHG
USP
S
Load monitoring
Commissioning
The extended monitoring functions are activated while the commissioning Wizard is running.
Parameter r0108.17 indicates whether it has been activated.
6.7.3.2
Integration
Description
The extended monitoring functions are integrated in the system as follows.
p2181[D]
304
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Parameter
s
Description
p2182[D]
p2183[D]
p2184[D]
p2185[D]
...
p2190[D]
p2192[D]
p2150[D]
Hysteresis speed 3
p2151[C]
p2161[D]
Speed threshold 3
r2198.4
r2198.5
6.8
6.8.1
Description
Every Powerstack has eight 12-bit D/A converters on it that represent the input range 0x000
to 0xFFF as 0 to 10 V. The outputs can be tapped at terminals X231 and X232:
Output 0: X231.15 to ground X231.16
Output 1: X231.14 to ground X231.13
Output 2: X231.11 to ground X231.12
Output 3: X231.10 to ground X231.9
Output 4: X232.15 to ground X232.16
Output 5: X232.14 to ground X232.13
Output 6: X232.11 to ground X232.12
Output 7: X232.10 to ground X232.9
The variables can be recorded with ordinary commercial analog recorder. Since the analog
outputs are recorded in the 500s grid, the recorder should have a scanning frequency of at
least 2kHz. Otherwise scanning errors may occur.
Selection of signals
The sources of the signals should be set in parameters p6840[PDS] to p6847 [PDS] (access
level 3). The starter suggests a suitable selection list for each input. The 0% and 100%
values can also be set to calibrate the recorder. This allows the recorder offset and scaling to
be checked.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
305
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
If the converter has a number of power stacks, parameters p6840 to p6847 are declared.
Each additional powerstack thus provides 8 new analog outputs.
6FDOLQJIDFWRU
6LJQDOYDOXH
2IIVHW
Figure 6-53
Parameter
Unit
Scaling
(100 % = ...)
r0060
rpm
p2000
r0061
rpm
p2000
306
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
Signal
Speed actual value
Parameter
r0063
Unit
rpm
Scaling
(100 % = ...)
p2000
r0066
Hz
P2000 / 60
r0068
Arms
p2002
r0070
p2001
r0079
Nm
p2003
r0082
kW
r2004
Control deviation
r0064
rpm
p2000
Modulation depth
r0074
r0077
p2002
r0078
p2002
Flux setpoint
r0083
r0084
Speed controller
PI torque output
r1480
Nm
p2003
Speed controller
I torque output
r1482
Nm
p2003
6.8.2
Integration
Description
The extended diagnostic functions are integrated in the system as follows.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
307
Start
Functions
6.8 Extended diagnostic functions
308
Parameters
Description
p6840[PDS] to p6847[PDS]
p6850[PDS] to p6857[PDS]
p6860[PDS] to p6867[PDS]
p6870[PDS] to p6877[PDS]
p6880[PDS] to p6887[PDS]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
7.2
7.3
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
309
Start
Insulation monitoring
The insulation monitor IRDH275-635 (Bender) has an external reset input. This input is
interconnected in such a way that the error messages are automatically acknowledged at the
insulation monitoring device.
If the converter ground is removed, the insulation resistance changes from short circuit to the
system-specific setpoint.
The error message is acknowledged.
7.4
Diagnostics
7.4.1
Introduction
Description
This section describes procedures for identifying the causes of problems and the measures
you need to take to rectify them.
Note
If errors or malfunctions occur in the cabinet unit, you must carefully check the possible
causes and take the necessary steps to rectify them. If you cannot identify the cause of the
problem or you discover that components are defective, your regional office or sales office
should contact Siemens Service and describe the problem in more detail.
7.4.2
310
State
Description
---
OFF
Green
Continuously lit
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Color
State
Description
2 Hz flashing light
Continuously lit
0.5 Hz
flashing light
Green
Red
0.5 Hz
flashing light
Orange
Continuously lit
0.5 Hz
flashing light
2 Hz flashing light
OFF
RDY
(ready)
Red
---
Note:
PROFIBUS is ready for communication when the
Control Unit is ready (see LED RDY).
DP1
(PROFIBUS cyclic
operation)
Green
Continuously lit
0.5 Hz
flashing light
Red
Continuously lit
---
OFF
Green
Continuously lit
0.5 Hz
flashing light
Red
Continuously lit
---
OFF
Reserved
Green
Continuously lit
Reserved
OPT
(option)
MOD
READY
State
Description
---
OFF
Green
Continuously lit
Red
Continuously lit
Fault present
[ID 5174]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
311
Start
7.4.3
Drive status
r0046
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
No
Yes
01
No
Yes
02
No
Yes
03
No
Yes
05
No
Yes
06
No
Yes
09
No
Yes
10
No
Yes
11t
No
Yes
12t
No setpoint enable
No
Yes
16
No
Yes
17
No
Yes
18
No
Yes
26
No
Yes
r0050
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
No
Yes
01
No
Yes
02
No
Yes
03
No
Yes
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
DI 0 (X122.1)
Low
High
312
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
01
DI 1 (X122.2)
Low
High
02
DI 2 (X122.3)
Low
High
03
DI 3 (X122.4)
Low
High
04
DI 4 (X132.1)
Low
High
05
DI 5 (X132.2)
Low
High
06
DI 6 (X132.3)
Low
High
07
DI 7 (X132.4)
Low
High
08
DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
Low
High
11
DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
Low
High
12
DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
Low
High
13
DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
Low
High
14
DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
Low
High
15
DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Low
High
r0747
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
08
DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
Low
High
11
DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
Low
High
12
DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
Low
High
13
DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
Low
High
14
DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
Low
High
15
DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Low
High
r4022
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
DI 0 (X520.1)
Low
High
01
DI 1 (X520.2)
Low
High
02
DI 2 (X520.3)
Low
High
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
313
Start
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
03
DI 3 (X520.4)
Low
High
04
DI 4 (X530.1)
Low
High
05
DI 5 (X530.2)
Low
High
06
DI 6 (X530.3)
Low
High
07
DI 7 (X530.4)
Low
High
08
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
Low
High
11
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
Low
High
r4047
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
DO 0 (X542.1 - 3)
Low
High
01
DO 1 (X542.4 - 6)
Low
High
08
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
Low
High
11
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
Low
High
r4022
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
DI/DO 0 (X520.2)
Low
High
01
DI/DO 1 (X520.3)
Low
High
02
DI/DO 2 (X520.4)
Low
High
03
DI/DO 3 (X520.5)
Low
High
04
DI/DO 4 (X520.6)
Low
High
05
DI/DO 5 (X520.7)
Low
High
06
DI/DO 6 (X520.8)
Low
High
07
DI/DO 7 (X520.9)
Low
High
08
DI/DO 8 (X521.2)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X521.3)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X521.4)
Low
High
314
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
11
DI/DO 11 (X521.5)
Low
High
12
DI/DO 12 (X521.6)
Low
High
13
DI/DO 13 (X521.7)
Low
High
14
DI/DO 14 (X521.8)
Low
High
15
DI/DO 15 (X521.9)
Low
High
16
DI/DO 16 (X522.2)
Low
High
17
DI/DO 17 (X522.3)
Low
High
18
DI/DO 18 (X522.4)
Low
High
19
DI/DO 19 (X522.5)
Low
High
20
DI/DO 20 (X522.6)
Low
High
21
DI/DO 21 (X522.7)
Low
High
22
DI/DO 22 (X522.8)
Low
High
23
DI/DO 23 (X522.9)
Low
High
r4047
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
00
DI/DO 0 (X520.2)
Low
High
01
DI/DO 1 (X520.3)
Low
High
02
DI/DO 2 (X520.4)
Low
High
03
DI/DO 3 (X520.5)
Low
High
04
DI/DO 4 (X520.6)
Low
High
05
DI/DO 5 (X520.7)
Low
High
06
DI/DO 6 (X520.8)
Low
High
07
DI/DO 7 (X520.9)
Low
High
08
DI/DO 8 (X521.2)
Low
High
09
DI/DO 9 (X521.3)
Low
High
10
DI/DO 10 (X521.4)
Low
High
11
DI/DO 11 (X521.5)
Low
High
12
DI/DO 12 (X521.6)
Low
High
13
DI/DO 13 (X521.7)
Low
High
14
DI/DO 14 (X521.8)
Low
High
15
DI/DO 15 (X521.9)
Low
High
16
DI/DO 16 (X522.2)
Low
High
17
DI/DO 17 (X522.3)
Low
High
18
DI/DO 18 (X522.4)
Low
High
19
DI/DO 19 (X522.5)
Low
High
20
DI/DO 20 (X522.6)
Low
High
21
DI/DO 21 (X522.7)
Low
High
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
315
Start
Bit
Signal name
0-signal
1-signal
22
DI/DO 22 (X522.8)
Low
High
23
DI/DO 23 (X522.9)
Low
High
7.4.4
Overview
The cabinet device has a number of protective functions that protect the converter from
damage in the event of a fault (faults and alarms).
What is a fault?
A fault is a message from the converter indicating an error or other exceptional (unwanted)
status. This could be caused by a fault within the converter or an external fault triggered, for
example, from the winding temperature monitor for the asynchronous motor. The faults are
displayed and can be reported to a higher-level control system via PROFIBUS. In the factory
default setting, the message "converter fault" is also sent to a relay output. Once you have
rectified the cause of the fault, you have to acknowledge the fault message.
What is an alarm?
An alarm is the response to a fault condition identified by the converter. It does not result in
the converter being switched off and does not have to be acknowledged. Alarms are "self
acknowledging", that is, they are reset automatically when the cause of the alarm has been
eliminated.
316
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.1
Troubleshooting/FAQs
Description
This chapter is intended to contain troubleshooting tips and FAQs and will be revised in each
new version of the document.
A.2
List of abbreviations
Summary
Table A-1
Abbreviation
Description
AC
AC voltage
AO
Analog Output
IM
Induction Motor
BI
Binector Input
BO
Binector Output
CDS
CF card
CompactFlash card
CI
Connector Input
CU
Control Unit
CO
Connector Output
DC
DC voltage
DOxx
Digital Output
DO
Drive Object
ESD
FBD
Hz
Hertz
CB
Circuit-Breaker
FOC
Motor
MLFB
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
317
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3
Abbreviation
Description
PG
Programming device
PSA
RAM
ROM
STW
Control word
TM
Terminal Module
VDC link
DC link voltage
VSM
A.3.1
Description
Every drive contains a large number of interconnectable input and output variables and
internal control variables.
BICO technology (Binector Connector Technology) allows the drive to be adapted to a wide
variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be connected freely by means of BICO parameters,
are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI or CO in their parameter name. These parameters are
identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams.
Note
The STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool is recommended when using BICO
technology.
Binectors
Name
Description
BI
Binector input
Binector input
(signal sink)
318
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Abbreviation and symbol
Name
Description
BO
Binector output
Binector output
(signal source)
Connectors
Name
Description
CI
Connector input
Connector input
CO
(signal sink)
Connector output
Connector output
(signal source)
A.3.2
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
319
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection with
other parameters.
CI: Connector input
This parameter selects the source of an "analog" signal.
CO: Connector output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other parameters.
CO/BO: Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as both an "analog" and a digital signal for interconnection with
other parameters.
A.3.3
320
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Overview
Table A-4
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
608
[0]
CI:
Trafo temperature
signal source
(Trafotemp S_src)
B_INF
MV
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
4105
CO:
TM31 Temperature
evaluation, actual
value
(TM31 Temp actual)
TM31_1
X522.7 (+)
X522.8 (-)
CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swtch 0 ctrl sig) ["On"
command]
B_INFMV
Note:
Temperature
evaluation is
disabled in the
default setting. If a
temperature sensor
is connected, then
evaluation must be
enabled on TM31_1
via p4100.
728
738
CU:
Set input or output
(CU DI or DO)
CU_GM
=0xffff*
[DI/DO 8]
Set as output
X122.7/
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 9]
X122.8/
Set as output
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 10]
Set as output
X122.10/
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 11]
Set as output
X122.11/
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 12]
Set as output
X132.7
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 13]
Set as output
X132.8
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 14]
Set as output
X132.10
[=.nHA-A11]
[DI/DO 15]
Set as output
X132.11
[=.nHA-A11]
BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 8
(CU S_src DI/DO 8)
CU_GM
[=.nHC-A51]
X122.7
[=.nHA-A11]
6660.0
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
321
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
739
BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 9
(CU S_src DI/DO 9)
CU_GM
X122.8
6660.1
CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig) ["Off"
command]
B_INFMV
[=.nHA-A11]
740
CU_GM
BI:
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 10
(CU S_src DI/DO 10)
X122.10
[=.nHA-A11]
6660.2
CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig)
["Undervoltage coil off"
command]
B_INFMV
741
BI:
CU_GM
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 11
(CU S_src DI/DO 11)
X122.11
[=.nHA-A11]
6571.0
BO:
Precharging control
word
(Precharging STW)
[Precharging On
command]
B_INFMV
743
BI:
CU_GM
CU signal source for
terminal DI/DO 13
(CU S_src DI/DO 13)
X132.8
[=.nHA-A11]
6660.3
CO/BO:
Switch 0 control
signals
(Swch 0 ctrl sig)
B_INFMV
Terminal
[item code]
["Higher-level switch
off" command]
810
VECTOR
MV
4022.11
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 11]
TM15_2
840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)
B_INF
MV
r0863.1
VECTOR
MV
845
BI:
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2
CDS
(2. OFF2)
B_INF
MV
899.4
VECTOR
MV
845
BI:
[0 to 3] 2. OFF2
CDS
(2. OFF2)
VECTOR
MV
722.6
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 6]
CU_GM
864[0]
VECTOR
MV
863.0
B_INFMV
322
BI:
Command data set
selection CDS bit 0
(select CDS bit 0)
BI:
Infeed operation
(INF operation)
X521.5
[=.nHC-A31]
X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
876[0]
BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)
877[0]
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
B_INFM
V
899.13
External switching
on inhibited
inversion
(Ext inhibit Inv)
B_INFM
V
=1*
876[0]
BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)
VECTOR
MV
899.13
877[0]
External switching
on inhibited
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv
VECTOR
MV
=1*
876[1]
BI:
External switching
on inhibited signal
source
(Ext inhibit S_src)
VECTOR
MV
899.6
877[1]
External switching
on inhibited
inversion/Ext inhibit
Inv
VECTOR
MV
=1*
1208
[0]
VECTOR
MV
6530.0
4028
TM15DI/DO Set
input or output
(TM15D DI or DO)
TM15_1
=0x11F0
3*
[DI/DO 0]
Set as output
X520.2
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 1]
Set as output
X520.3
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 2]
Set as input
X520.4
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 3]
Set as input
X520.5
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 4]
Set as input
X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
B_INFMV
B_INFMV
CO/BO: Status word
sequencer infeed
(ZSW Seq INF)
[Switching on inhibited]
CO/BO:
Line status
(Line status)
[line voltage present]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
B_INFMV
323
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]
324
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
[DI/DO 5]
Set as input
X520.7
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 6]
Set as input
X520.8
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 7]
Set as input
X520.9
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 8]
Set as output
X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 9]
Set as output
X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 10]
Set as output
X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 11]
Set as output
X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 12]
Set as output
X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 13]
Set as input
X521.7
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 14]
Set as input
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 15]
Set as input
X521.9
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 16]
Set as output
X522.2
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 17]
Set as input
X522.3
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 18]
Set as input
X522.4
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 19]
Set as input
X522.5
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 20]
Set as input
X522.6
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 21]
Set as input
X522.7
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 22]
Set as input
X522.8
[=.nHC-A11]
[DI/DO 23]
Set as input
X522.9
[=n.HC-A11]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
4030
BI:
TM31 Signal source
for terminal DO 0
(TM31 S_src DO 0)
Explanation:
Enable command
from the sequencer
to enable the door
magnets
TM31_1
4031
4071
[0]
4100
Terminal
[item code]
BI: Low
COM 0
(X542.2) +
NC 0
(X542.1)
[=.nHC-A51]
BI: High
COM 0
(X542.2) +
NO 0
(X542.3)
[=.nHC-A51]
BI:
TM31 signal source
for terminal DO 1
(TM31 S_src DO)1
TM31_1
BI: Low
COM 1
(X542.5) +
NC 1
(X542.4)
[=.nHC-A51]
BI: High
COM 1
(X542.5) with
NO 1
(X542.6)
[=.nHC-A51]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
4023.18
CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital inputs inverted
status
(TM15D DI Stat inv)
[DI/DO 18]
Explanation:
Ground fault
monitoring fault checkback signal
TM15_1
X522.4
[=.nHC-A11]
1214.2
CO/BO: Automatic
restart status
(AR status)
[Automatic restart
active]
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
CI:
TM31 analog
outputs signal
source
(TM31 AO
Sig_source)
TM31_1
[0] = AO 0
(X522.1,
X522.2,
X522.3)
[=.nHC-A51]
63[1]
TM31 Temperature
evaluation, sensor
type
(TM31 Temp
Sens_typ)
TM31
X522.7(+)
X522.8(-)
[=.nHC-A51]
=2*
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
325
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
6531
BI:
Precharging twopoint control
activation
(Prech_Twopoint
Act)
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
B_INF
MV
1214.9
CO/BO: Automatic
restart status
(AR status)
VECTOR
MV
6500
[44]
BI:
B_INF
External digital
MV
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Mess S_src)
Explanation:
Error, overvoltage
protection 1 AC
230 V
4023.7
CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status inverted
(TM31 DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 7]
TM31_1
X530.4
[=.nHC-A51]
6576
[0]
VECTOR
MV
722.6
CO/BO: CU digital
inputs Status/CU DI
Status
[DI 6]
CU_GM
X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]
6576
[1]
VECTOR
MV
722.7
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 7]
CU_GM
X132.4
[=.nHA-A11]
6670
[0]
=0*
6577
[0]
Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, "Safe On"
status word checkback signal
(Manual + Motor)
B_INF
MV
4022.19
CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 19]
TM15_1
X522.5
[=.nHC-A11]
6577
[1]
Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, "Safe Off"
status word checkback signal
(Manual + Motor)
B_INFM
V
4022.20
CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 20]
TM15_1
X522.6
[=.nHC-A11]
6577
[2]
4022.18
CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 18]
TM15_1
X522.4
6577
[3]
4022.17
CO/BO: TM15DI/DO
Digital input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 18]
TM15_1
326
Terminal
[item code]
Terminal
[item code]
[=.nHC-A11]
X522.3
[=.nHC-A11]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
6577
[4]
Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, Voltage
monitoring infeed 1
AC status word
check-back signal
6577
[5]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
B_INF
MV
4022.0
CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI/DO 0]
TM31_1
X520.1
[=.nHC-A51]
Infeed cabinet/motor
cabinet, Voltage
monitoring 24 VDC
status word checkback signal
B_INF
MV
4022.1
CO/BO:
TM31 Digital input
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI/DO 1]
TM31_1
X520.2
[=.nHC-A51]
6684
[0]
BI:
Switch check-back
signal ready
(Swch CB ready)
B_INF
MV
722.0
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 0]
CU_GM
X122.1
[=.nHA-A11]
6685
[0]
BI:
Switch check-back
signal On
(Swch CB on)
B_INF
MV
722.2
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 2]
CU_GM
X122.3
[=.nHA-A11]
6686
[0]
BI:
Switch check-back
signal off
(Swch CB off)
B_INF
MV
722.1
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 1]
CU_GM
X122.2
[=.nHA-A11]
6687
[0]
BI:
Switch check-back
signal auxiliary
voltage 1 OK
(Swch CB U_Aux1)
B_INF
MV
722.4
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 4]
CU_GM
X132.1
[=.nHA-A11]
6688
BI:
Switch check-back
signal auxiliary
voltage 2 OK
(Swch CB U_Aux2)
B_INF
MV
722.5
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 5]
CU_GM
X132.2
[=.nHA-A11]
BI:
B_INF
MV
722.3
CO/BO:
CU digital inputs,
status
CU_GM
X122.4
[=.nHA-A11]
[0]
6689
[0]
6816
Switch check-back
signal external
switch-off
(Sch RM Ext Swchoff)
CI:
Braking controller
precontrol capability
(P_Precontrol)
Terminal
[item code]
(CU DI status)
[DI 3]
B_INF
MV
82[0]
VECTOR
MV
(P_act)
[Unsmoothed]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
327
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
6825
[0]
BI:
Braking controller
braking resistor
temperature
protection
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
alarm]
6825
[1]
BI:
Braking controller
braking resistor
temperature
protection
(R_Brake Protect)
[Overtemperature
fault]
A.3.4
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
B_INF
MV
4023.7
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 7]
TM15_1
X520.9
[=.nHC-A11]
B_INF
MV
4023.21
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 21]
TM15_1
X522.7
[=.nHC-A11]
328
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Overview
Table A-5
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
675
[0,...3]
CI:
Motor supply air
temperature signal
source
(Mot
SupplyAirTemp
S_src)
VECTOR
MV
CDS
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
37.3
CO:
Power unit
temperatures
(PU temperatures)
[Supply air]
VECTOR
MV
Terminal
[item code]
A.3.5
Overview of standard interconnections for the parameter macro PM001540 on
B_INFMV
Calling parameter macro PM001540
Parameter macro PM001540 is called by the autostart macro.
Overview
Table A-6
Sink
Parameter
[value]
6798
[0]
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
B_INFMV
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
4022.2
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X520.4
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 2]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
329
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
6798
[1]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
B_INFMV
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
4022.3
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X520.5
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_1
X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_1
X520.7
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 3]
6798
[2]
B_INFMV
6798
[3]
B_INFMV
4022.4
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
4022.5
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 5]
742
BI:
CU_GM
X132.7
[=.nHA-A11]
6800.0
BI:
CU signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 14
(CU S_src DI/DO
14)
330
CU_GM
X132.10
[=.nHA-A11]
6800.1
B_INFMV
BO:
BO:
Main fan control word
(Main fan STW)
[Redundant main fan
on]
B_INFMV
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.6
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001555 for option G66
Overview
Table A-7
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
6844
[0]
CI:
PDS
6845
[0]
PDS
6846
[0]
PDS
6847
[0]
PDS
DO
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
4 signal source
(PSA AO 4 S_src)
70[1]
CO:
B_INFMV
CI:
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
5 signal source
(PSA AO 5 S_src)
70[2]
CI:
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
6 signal source
(PSA AO 6 S_src)
76
CI:
78
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
7 signal source
(PSA AO 7 S_src)
Terminal
[item code]
Terminal
[item code]
B_INFMV
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
331
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.7
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001557 Analog O PSA
for options K21 and K20
Overview
Table A-8
Sink
Parameter
[value]
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_1
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_2
X520.6
840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)
VECTOR
MV
4022.14
852
BI:
[0 to 3] Enable operation
CDS
(Enable operation)
VECTOR
MV
4022.14
2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)
VECTOR
MV
4022.4
2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)
B_INFMV
4022.4
4038
TM15_1
BI:
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
332
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_2
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
X521.2
899.3
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Fault present]
899.7
CO/BO:
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
TM15_1
X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]
X520.6
[=.nHC-A11]
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]
4040
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
BI:
TM15_1
X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]
899.2
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]
TM15_1
X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]
899.0
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Ready to switch on]
TM15_1
X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]
807.0
BO:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
6840
[0]
PDS
6841
[0]
PDS
6842
[0]
PDS
6843
[0]
PDS
CI:
25
CI:
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
1 signal source
(PSA AO 1 S_src)
27
CO:
VECTOR
Current actual value,
MV
absolute value
smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)
CI:
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
2 signal source
(PSA AO 2 S_src)
21
CO:
CI:
32
Output voltage
smoothed
(U_Out smooth)
Terminal
[item code]
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
0 signal source
(PSA AO 0 S_src)
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
3 signal source
(PSA AO 3 S_src)
CO:
DO
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
CO:
VECTOR
MV
Active power actual
value smoothed
(P_Active_actual_smoo
th)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
333
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.8
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001558 Analog O PSA
for options K22 and K20
Overview
Table A-9
Sink
Parameter
[value]
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_1
X521.8
840
BI:
[0 to 3] ON/OFF1
CDS
(ON/OFF1)
VECTOR
MV
4022.14
852
BI:
[0 to 3] Enable operation
CDS
(Enable operation)
VECTOR
MV
4022.14
2103
BI:
[0 to 3] 1. Acknowledge
CDS
faults
(1. Acknowledge)
VECTOR
MV
4022.4
2103
[0,...3]
B_INFMV
4022.4
CDS
4038
4039
BI:
1. Acknowledge
faults
(1. Acknowledge)
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
CO/BO:
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_2
X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]
TM15_2
X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
TM15_1
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]
899.3
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)[Fault
present]
TM15_1
X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]
899.7
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
334
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Parameter
[value]
4040
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
BI:
TM15_1
X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]
899.2
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]
TM15_1
X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]
899.0
CO/BO:
VECTOR
Status word sequencer MV
(ZSW sequencer)
[Ready to switch on]
TM15_1
X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]
807.0
BO:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
4041
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042
BI:
TM15DI/DO Signal
source for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
6840
[0]
PDS
6841
[0]
PDS
CI:
35[0]
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
1 signal source
27
CO:
VECTOR
MV
Current actual value,
absolute value
smoothed
(I_Act abslt val smooth)
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
2 signal source
(PSA AO 2 S_src)
21
CO:
CI:
32
Motor temperature
(Motor temperature)
[Temperature sensor 1]
(PSA AO 1 S_src)
6842
[0]
PDS
6843
[0]
PDS
CI:
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
3 signal source
(PSA AO 3 S_src)
Terminal
[item code]
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
PSA Analog output MV
0 signal source
(PSA AO 0 S_src)
CI:
CO:
DO
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
CO:
VECTOR
MV
Active power actual
value smoothed
(P_Active_actual_smoo
th)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
335
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.9
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001571 for Emergency
Button 1 option
Overview
Table A-10
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
845
[0,...3]
BI:
CDS
849
[0,...3]
CDS
2. OFF2
(2. OFF2)
BI:
2. OFF3
(2. OFF3)
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
VECTOR
MV
Bit 1 = 1:
VECTOR
MV
722.6
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CU_GM
X132.3
[=.nHA-A11]
No OFF2 (enable is
possible)
CO/BO:
CU digital input status
(CU DI Status)
[DI 6]
A.3.10
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001580 Lamps and
StartStop Button
Overview
Table A-11
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
840
[0,...3]
BI:
VECTOR
MV
CDS
336
ON/OFF1
(ON/OFF1)
4022.14
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
852
[0,...3]
BI:
VECTOR
MV
4022.14
VECTOR
MV
4022.4
B_INFMV
4022.4
CDS
2103
[0,...3]
CDS
2103
[0,...3]
CDS
4038
Enable
operation
(Enable
operation)
BI:
1. Acknowledge
faults
(1.
Acknowledge)
BI:
BI:
BI:
BI:
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 10
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 10)
[DI/DO 10]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X521.8
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15_2
X520.6
[=.nHC-A31]
TM15_2
X520.6
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
CO/BO:
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 4]
TM15_1
TM15_1
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 9
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 9)
[DI/DO 9]
4040
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status
(TM15D DI Status)
[DI/DO 14]
1. Acknowledge
faults
(1.
Acknowledge)
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 8
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 8)
[DI/DO 8]
4039
TM15_1
X521.2
[=.nHC-A11]
899.3
X521.3
[=.nHC-A11]
899.7
X521.4
[=.nHC-A11]
899.2
CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)[Fault
present]
CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)
[Alarm present]
CO/BO:
Status word sequencer
(ZSW sequencer)
[Operation enabled]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
[=.nHC-A31]
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
337
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
4041
BI:
TM15_1
X521.5
[=.nHC-A11]
899.0
CO/BO:
VECTOR
MV
X521.6
[=.nHC-A11]
807.0
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 11
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 11)
[DI/DO 11]
4042
TM15_1
BI:
TM15DI/DO
Signal source
for terminal
DI/DO 12
(TM15D S_scr
DI/DO 12)
[DI/DO 12]
BO:
Master control active
(PcCtrl active)
[Master control active]
Terminal
[item code]
VECTOR
MV
A.3.11
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001582 for option L27L29 Bypass1
Overview
Table A-12
Sink
Parameter
[value]
1268
Source
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
BI:
VECTOR
MV
338
3819.2
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
CO/BO:
VECTOR
MV
Terminal
[item code]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
3802
[0,...3]
BI:
VECTOR
MV
1261.2
VECTOR
MV
1261.9
VECTOR
MV
1261.9
VECTOR
MV
1261.1
VECTOR
MV
1261.1
CDS
BI:
6670
[2]
BI:
6671
[1]
BI:
6671
[2]
BI:
6675
[1]
=1*
6675
[2]
=1*
6676
[1]
Maximum
switch-off time
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[1] = switch 1]
VECTOR
MV
=1*
Switch,
simulation mode
(Swch
Sim_mode)
[[2] = Switch 2]
Switch on/off
(Swch on/off)
[[1] = Switch 1]
Switch on/off
(Swch on/off)
[[2] = Switch 2]
DO
CO/BO:
VECTOR
MV
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Synchronization
requested]
6670
[1]
Switch,
simulation mode
(Swch
Sim_mode)
[[1] = Switch 1]
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Staging requested (by
p2369)]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Staging requested (by
p2369)]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
[Motor line
switch command]
CO/BO:
Bypass control/status
word
(Bypass STW/ZSW)
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Terminal
[item code]
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
VECTOR
MV
339
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
6676
[2]
Maximum
switch-off time
switch
(Swch t_Off
max)
[[2] = switch 2]
VECTOR
MV
=1*
6677
[1]
VECTOR
Switch-on
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[1] = switch 1]
=0*
0: Continuous signal
6677
[2]
VECTOR
Switch-on
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch On Signal
type)
[[2] = switch 2]
=0*
0: Continuous signal
6678
[1]
Switch-off
VECTOR
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)
=0*
0: Continuous signal
6678
[2]
Switch-off
VECTOR
command signal MV
type switch
(Swch Off Signal
type)
=1*
1: Pulse signal
340
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
=0*
=1*
DO
Terminal
[item code]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.12
UPS
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001583 for option L53
Summary
Table A-13
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value] /
data
block
BICO: Parameter
name (long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]
DO
6500[24]]
BI:
External digital
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Msg S_q)
[A49024]
B_INFMV
BI:
External digital
messages, signal
source
(Ext dig Msg S_q)
[A49025]
B_INFMV
6500[25]]
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Parameter name
(long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
4022.2
CO/BO:
TM31 Digital inputs
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI 2]
TM31_1
X520.3
CO/BO:
TM31 Digital inputs
status
(TM31 DI Status)
[DI 3]
TM31_1
4022.3
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
[=.nHCA11]
X520.4
[=.nHCA11]
341
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.13
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001584 for option L55
Standstill Heating
Overview
Table A-14
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
6500
[26]
BI:
B_INFMV
4023.13
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM15_1
X521.7
[=.nHC-A11]
TM15DI/DO Digital
input status inverted
(TM15D DI Status inv)
[DI/DO 13]
External digital
messages,
signal source
(Ext dig Msg
S_src)
[A49026]
A.3.14
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001585 for options
N20, N21 Capacitor Tripping device Circuit Breaker
Overview
Table A-15
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Long parameter
name
(short
parameter
name)
[signal name]
DO
6500
[45]
BI:
B_INFMV
342
External digital
messages,
signal source
(Ext dig Msg
S_src)
[A49045]
4023.8
BICO:
Long parameter name
(short
parameter name)
[signal name]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
CO/BO:
TM31_1
X541.2
[=.nHC-A51]]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Appendix
A.3 Parameters for interconnecting signals
A.3.15
Parameter interconnection overview for optional macro PM001587 for option
Motor temperature sensors
Overview
Table A-16
Sink
Source
Parameter
[value] /
data
block
BICO: Parameter
name (long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]
DO
603[0]
CI:
Motor
temperature
signal source
Terminal
[item code]
Parameter
[value]
BICO:
Parameter name
(long)
(Parameter name
(short)) [signal
name]
VECTOR
MV
4055[0]
CO:
TM31_2
TM31 analog inputs,
actual value in
percent
(TM31 AI value in
%)
[[0] = AI 0]
X521.1
X521.2,
S5.0)
[=.nHDA31]
VECTOR
MV
4055[1]
TM31_2
CO:
TM31 analog inputs,
actual value in
percent
(TM31 AI value in
%)
[[1] = AI 1]
X521.3
X521.4,
S5.1)
[=.nHDA31]
DO
Terminal
[item code]
[1] = Temperature
sensor 2
603[1]
CI:
Motor
temperature
signal source
(Mot Temp S_q)
[Temperature
sensor 2]
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
343
Start
Start
Glossary
Access level
The drive is protected from unauthorized access using the access levels. The parameters
are divided into different access levels. The access level first needs to be set in order to
display and change a parameter using the BOP.
Adjustable parameters
These parameters are write/read parameters.
Alarm
An alarm is the response to a potential or expected fault condition detected by the drive that
does not cause the drive to switch off and does not have to be acknowledged. The alarm
mechanism is specified in the PROFIdrive profile. The drive sends a pending alarm to the
control system via a bit in the status word.
Analog input
Terminal to which an external analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal
(e.g. 0 to 20 mA) can be connected. An A/D converter forms an internal software signal from
this signal. The analog inputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.
Analog output
Terminal at which an analog voltage signal (e.g. -10 V to +10 V) or a current signal (e.g. 0 to
20 mA) is output. The signal is formed by converting an internal software signal using an A/D
converter. The analog outputs may be provided by the TMxx terminal modules, for example.
Automatic restart
After a power failure, the automatic restart function automatically restarts a converter when
the supply voltage recovers. It does not require acknowledgement of the power failure fault.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
345
Start
Glossary
BICO technology
The BICO technology method is used for freely interconnecting process data via "standard"
drive parameterization.
BOP
A simple, small operator panel with a numeric display and a few keys that can be plugged in
to the control unit.
CompactFlash card
Memory card for non-volatile storage of the drive software and associated parameters. The
memory card can be plugged into the Control Unit from outside.
Control Unit
Central control module in which the closed-loop and open-loop control functions for one or
more SINAMICS Line Modules and/or Motor Modules are implemented.
Data set
Parameters can be grouped together in a data set. This allows a range of use cases to be
implemented by parameterizing and switching between the data sets. The individual data
sets are entered as "indexed parameters". Switchover is carried out using input signals.
DC link
The component of the converter (or converter system) that connects the input current
converter (rectifier) and the output current converter (one or more inverters).
With voltage source DC link inverters such as SINAMICS devices, a constant DC voltage is
present in the DC link (rectified supply voltage).
DC link voltage
Voltage in a frequency converter's DC link.
Digital input
Input terminal for a +24 V control signal.
Digital output
Output terminal for a +24 V control signal or a relay output.
Direction of rotation
When looking at the front of the outgoing motor shaft, the following applies:
346
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Drive object(DO)
A drive object is a self-contained software function with its own parameters and, if
necessary, its own faults and alarms. Drive objects can be provided as standard (e.g. onboard I/O), or can be added individually or multiply (e.g. servo control). As a rule, each drive
object has its own STARTER window for parameterization and diagnostic purposes.
Encoder
An encoder is a measuring system that captures actual values for the speed and/or angular
or relative positions and makes them available for electronic processing. Depending on their
mechanical design, encoders can be built into the motor (motor encoder) or mounted on the
external mechanics (external encoder). Depending on the type of motion, a distinction is
made between rotary encoders (sometimes called "shaft encoders") and translatory
encoders (e.g., linear position encoders). In terms of measured value provision, a distinction
is made between "absolute encoders" (code encoders) and -> "incremental encoders". See > "Incremental encoder TTL/HTL" -> "Incremental encoder sin/cos 1Vpp" -> "Resolver".
Incremental position and speed encoder. Unlike the absolute encoder, this encoder does not
output an actual position value signal corresponding to the absolute position, but instead
outputs incremental "delta position or angular signals". There are three types of incremental
encoders: the incremental encoder TTL/HTL, the incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, and the
resolver.
Incremental position and speed encoder (incremental encoder), which usually produces two
pulse trains (tracks) offset at 90 degrees with square-wave output signals and generally also
one zero pulse per revolution. The output signals have TTL levels (in most cases +5 V
RS422 differential signals; TTL = Transistor-Transistor Logic) or HTL levels (+15 or +24 V
logic level; HTL = High Level Transistor Logic).
A high-resolution optical sine/cosine encoder that can be installed in 1FK6 motors as a motor
encoder, for example.
The following signals are normally output:
Two signals offset by 90 degrees, each with 2,048 sinusoidal signal periods per
revolution as differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (A/B sinusoidal encoder
tracks).
A reference signal (zero pulse) per revolution as a differential signal with an amplitude of
0.5 Vpp.
With certain types, two additional sinusoidal signal periods offset by 90 degrees as
differential signals with an amplitude of 1 Vpp (C/D track).
To determine the actual position/angular value, the zero crossings of the sinusoidal encoder
tracks are evaluated first (rough evaluation, e.g., in total 4 x 2,048 = 8,192 zero crossings
per revolution). In addition, a fine evaluation can be performed with analog amplitude
detection. Through a combination of rough and fine evaluations, resolutions of more than
1,000,000 increments per encoder revolution can be achieved. Typical sin/cos encoders
include, for example: ERN1387 and ERN1381.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
347
Start
Glossary
Resolver
Extremely mechanically and electrically robust and cost-efficient motor encoder that does not
require any integrated electronics and operates purely according to the electromagnetic
principle: One sine and one cosine signal are induced in each of the two coils offset by 90
degrees. The resolver supplies all of the signals required for speed-controlled operation of
the converter or for position control. The number of sine and cosine periods supplied per
revolution is equal to the number of pole pairs of the resolver. On a two-pole resolver, the
evaluation electronics can output an additional zero pulse for each encoder revolution, which
enables unique assignment of the position information with respect to an encoder revolution.
A two-pole resolver can be used as a single-turn encoder. Two-pole resolvers are suitable
for motors with any number of poles. With multi-pole resolvers, the pole pair numbers of the
motor and the resolver are always identical, which means that multi-pole resolvers ensure a
higher resolution than two-pole resolvers.
Fault
An unintended status that is identified and displayed by the drive controller or can be sent to
a higher-level controller. A fault normally causes the drive to shut down. In certain cases an
alternative reaction can be configured using the appropriate parameter. Faults must always
be acknowledged and the correct procedure for clearing them is specified by PROFIdrive.
Firmware
Firmware is the software saved on a CompactFlash card that is required for operating a
SINAMICS drive.
Firmware version
The version of the software for the control unit saved on the CompactFlash card. The
firmware versions of the individual components are displayed using different parameters.
Flying restart
Following power-up, the flying restart function automatically switches a converter into any
motor connected downstream. When switching into a running motor the motor first needs to
be remagnetized by an induction motor. With drives not equipped with an encoder, a search
for the current speed is also carried out. The current speed setpoint in the ramp-function
generator is then set to the current actual speed value. The ramp-up to the final speed
setpoint starts with this value. The flying restart function can help to shorten the ramp-up
procedure following power-up (if the load is still running down). Application example: After a
power failure, a fan drive can be quickly reconnected to the running fan impeller by means of
the flying restart function.
LOCAL mode
In LOCAL mode the user control unit (for example an AOP30) has master control over the
drive.
348
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Master control
Master control is usually assigned to a higher-level controller (e.g. PROFIBUS master). To
operate a drive using the STARTER commissioning tool, master control will occasionally
have to be assigned to the PC, after which master control is returned to the higher-level
controller.
Motor
For the electric motors that can be driven, a basic distinction is made between rotary and
linear motors with regard to their direction of motion, and between synchronous and
asynchronous motors with regard to their electromagnetic operating principle. The motors
are connected to motor modules.
Motor Module
A motor module is a power unit (DC-AC inverter) that provides the power supply for the
motor(s) connected to it. Power is supplied via the DC link on the drive unit. A motor module
must be connected to a control unit via DRIVE-CLiQ. The open-loop and closed-loop control
functions for the motor module are stored in the control unit.
Output frequency
Frequency of the sinusoidal output voltage from a converter.
Parameter
Variable used on the drive system that the user can read and, in some cases, write. A
parameter meets the drive specifications contained in the PROFIdrive profile.
Pre-charging
Charging the DC link capacitors using resistors. Pre-charging is normally performed from the
feeding supply network, but can also be performed from a pre-charged DC link (DC
coupling).
PROFIBUS
Field bus standardized in accordance with IEC 61158, Sections 2 to 6.
PROFIBUS stands for Process Field Bus. PROFIBUS is a multi-vendor standard for the
networking of field devices (e.g., PLC, drives, actuators, or sensors).
PROFIdrive
PROFIBUS profile specified for speed and position-controlled drives by the PROFIBUS User
Organization (German: PNO). The latest version is the PROFIdrive V3 profile.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
349
Start
Glossary
Project wizard
The project wizard provides assistance when creating a project by guiding users through the
configuration settings step-by-step.
REMOTE mode
In REMOTE mode a higher-level controller (for example a customer terminal strip or a
PROFIBUS master) has master control over the drive.
Servo control
This type of closed-loop control enables operation with a high dynamic response and
precision for a motor with a motor encoder. In addition to speed control, position control can
be implemented.
Setpoint channel
The setpoint for closed-loop control (e.g. closed-loop speed control) is conditioned in the
setpoint channel. The setpoints can be set either using
PROFIBUS
fixed setpoints or
a motorized potentiometer
The setpoint can be varied by a ramp-function generator, a filter or additional
feedforwarding, for example.
Short-circuiting device
A device which protects the system from dangerous voltages by providing a high contact
closing speed.
STARTER
STARTER is used to commission and parameterize drive units. This tool can also be used to
execute the diagnostic functions required when servicing the system (e.g. PROFIBUS
diagnostics, function generator, trace).
350
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
Start
Glossary
Terminal Module
Terminal expansion module that snaps onto the installation rail, for installation in the control
cabinet.
Topology
The topology describes the structure of a drive system consisting of a control unit, motor
modules, motors, encoders and terminal modules, including the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring and
other wiring.
Trace
Cyclic saving of internal process signals of the drive for diagnostic purposes or capturing
process data.
Vector control
Vector control (field-oriented control) is a high-performance control method for induction
machines. It is based on an exact model calculation of the motor and two current
components that simulate and accurately control the flux and torque by means of software
algorithms, thereby enabling predefined speeds and torques to be observed and limited
accurately and with a good dynamic response.
Two types of vector control exist:
frequency control (encoderless vector control), and
speed-torque control with speed feedback (encoder).
Visualization parameters
These read-only parameters are used to display important internal software signals.
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
351
Start
Start
Index
A
C
Changing over units, 197
Current setpoint filter
Vector, 244
D
Data sets
Command data set (CDS), 192
Drive data set (DDS), 193
Motor data set (MDS), 194
E
ESD guidelines, 11
ESD protective measures, 12
F
Five safety rules, 11
Fixed setpoints, 220
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Functions
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Jog, 216
Motorized potentiometer, 221
J
Jog, 216
JOG
Jog, 216
K
Kinetic buffering, 246
P
Parameter
Categories, 185
Types, 185
Pre-control
speed, 235
PROFIBUS, 20
PROFIBUS connection, 20
R
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
Reference model, 235
S
Setpoint channel
Direction of rotation limiting, 224
Direction reversal, 224
extended, 214
Fixed speed setpoints, 220
Jog, 216
Main/supplementary setpoint, 223
Motorized potentiometer, 221
Ramp function generator, extended, 226
Setpoint limitation, 225
Setpoint modification, 223
Suppression bandwidths, 225
Setpoint modification, 223
Setpoint sources, 215
Speed controller, 231
Reference model, 235
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Speed controller pre-control, 235
STARTER
Starting the drive project, 38, 117
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
353
Start
Switchover
Start
Index
T
Torque control, 240
V
Vdc control
Vector n/m control, 246
Vdc_max control
Vector n/m control, 248
Vdc_min control
Vector n/m control, 247
Vector
Speed controller adaptation, 233
Torque control, 240
Commissioning Manual for SINAMICS GM150, Software Version 2.5, STARTER Version 4.1
Commissioning Manual, 1/2008, A5E00923869K
355
Start